Home

User's Manual

Contents

1. 630 S LHS 00 90 01 31 3 A 38 31925 mea NAVI VE 00 20 20 avav evev0cls WI 00EVia TSGOW 3313W v1IDIG NOILdO daslaw 3LOW3N OOOEWS gt gt ONIAIM LYNASL IV a f ae n H ainN H LN3WdINOS aie An ara Toaino9 Snivavddy re Q31VI9USSV e 031411530 5 959 31DN 5 Addis a NG 00 VWel 33 Ud SH T L 006 001 S3IM3S 3 YALLINSNVAL 000615 k t ONIAIM 4LYNASL Iy 3 3 a ALON 1N3WdIn83 0 109 3 ies _ 131919055 G3L3HL1339 059 31DN a A3ddns G 00 vel lt 2 3LDN III 55519 5 4 3 dNOND I 559719 DE q O 8 V dnDND I SSY 31130238 3JVS ATTVOISNIMINI YALLINSNVYL 000615 01 39 Y NIILVOLU 83131559 19 NOILVYOO 1 SlGedVvZVH NLIN X TT OT 6 T Z I 2 r DNIAV3Q 37995 LON DQ DAT 9 2v2v02 31140v23 630 9 1HS 00 90 0131 3 A33 37995 1 Ey Dee emo WE T ONIAIM 31VN3il lv d Ead 1 4 0 LN3NdI083 3 9 SALON
2. 640 1 00 90 0130 q 33 37995 Ipo EZ De emat gt t 4 ac t ONISIA SLYNASL IV d MOTIBA O O il eu F ALON H LNAWdINGS cu AMD HN 10 1 09 e SNLVAVdd 1319190559 C3ALDaddv a ALILINd JAWS SALON EEE See A TddNS 4IW O0E VWel 33 Ud 2 3LON 93 i3 02 8 v dnuso cj 006 001 531535 I NDISIAIG HI II T SSV 12 YALLIWSNVYL 000915 NOILYOOI THIJISSV 19 SNOUCSVZVH NOILVYOU SNUCSVZVH NOUN L amp 5 FRA e T 7 T o l 6 T s v T Z T 3 x 9 g To A ONIAVE 3795 LUN DG V f GW NOILdO 33138 794931 006 001 531835 00015 0 t j iq 0 0 8 V dno T NOISIAIC IH II I 55919 NOILVOOT 3135155 19 SNUQAYZYH lt 9 SALON QI3L83ANOIO U3DIRRIVED Snivavddv C31VIQUSSV C3aA0add ALILIN3 3383 NDTIVOL I DATCS8 Ir2V02 i JIVI 31UND I1N3WdInO3 105 1 09 0 33 Ud S LITelg ZVH NLDN lyev0elS SNIAVAC 37995 LON DG v DAT6 Iv2v02 31LITVO 640 6 1 00 90 0131 33 3128 Trepoeig Ey auon WO OOEVYWA TSCOW amp 414 IVLIDIC avo 11
3. Model Series Description STA122 100 Absolute Pressure Transmitter STA140 100 Absolute Pressure Transmitter STD110 100 Differential Pressure Transmitter STD120 100 Differential Pressure Transmitter STD125 100 Differential Pressure Transmitter STD130 100 Differential Pressure Transmitter STD170 100 Differential Pressure Transmitter STF128 100 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF12F 100 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF132 100 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF13F 100 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF14F 100 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF14T 100 High Temperature Pressure Transmitter STG140 100 Gage Pressure Transmitter STG14L 100 Gage Pressure Transmitter STG14T 100 High Temperature Pressure Transmitter STG170 100 Gage Pressure Transmitter STG17L 100 Gage Pressure Transmitter STG180 100 Gage Pressure Transmitter STG18L 100 Gage Pressure Transmitter STR12D 100 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter STR13D 100 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter STR14A 100 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter STR14G 100 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter STR17G 100 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter STA922 900 Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter STA940 900 Gage and Absolute Pressure Transmitter STD924 900 Differential Pressure Transmitter STD930 900 Dif
4. 140 7 9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter 144 7 10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter eene eren 145 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote 147 SECTION 8 OPERATION 5 eee Ee e eR ore eonun pk ERR asua usut 151 SET Introduction u at a A scan e cum A x s a 151 8 2 Accessing Operation Data etr tede ettet e Her ee ono pe ied eed A EE d n 152 8 3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction cece teen etre eene emen 155 8 4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area ceeeeeeeeeeeee 157 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database ecane 159 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter 163 SEC TION 9 MAINTENANGCE U u uu 169 S MEN MMUOGUCUOM CIEL 169 9 2 Preventive Maintenance u a 170 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms U n 171 9 4 Replacing PWA eintreten uni etu eu ER ans seeds 175 9 5 Replacing Meter Body ett decet e dei e te u A E e eii ti t d 178 vi ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Table of Contents SECTION 10
5. a aimo 1N3WdInO3 8 v SALON GI313 3ANDO 78 3T3el V8 OALNOS SALvavddy 031 19055 31311339 93713N32 q ALON Addns 33 Ud 006 001 S3IN3S B S3LLIASNVe L 00015 Sl OII 9 X33 NHUILVOJU SNOCNYZYH NUILVOU 1 SNUCSVZVH NON vei TT OT 6 8 fs Z 3 S 2 SNIAVAd 37995 LON DG DAG S rF2r02IS JAVI 230 S IHS 00 90 olaLva 3 A32 yvcVv0c S ow Seu i a Evev0elS qvod ONISIA 3Jl1VN231 IV C 310N5 IN3WgIDO3 G v SALON 83183AND2 N3TSaI 98 G3IVIODSSV 2313511439 3313N39 eae 3AlDd 006 001 531435 9 x44 YALUWSNVaL 00015 S UGQ eS ZvH NLIN I OI 6 v 2 ONIAVAC 3199S LON DG DAT9 Ev2v0ZIG t 31LJIVO L30 9 LHS 00 90 01319 2 3779S Eperozig Ey eg Sema gt H O g T ONISIA SLYNASL WV AJJ O 38 MOTI3A O O e n zi E SS h a 3 cus 105109 SNLYXYddY os _ a3LVIOOSsy pJ TALIA 3313N33
6. 5 2 Establishing Communications continued Starting communications continued Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 Message exchange is taking place 5 c wonRkK iN Note that communications with transmitter are blocked until ID key is pressed ope Ir Ajel Transmitter is in analog 1 1 11111 1 1 1 E11 1 transmission mode LIN means transmitter is set for linear output OR instead of square root SQRT DP means transmitter is differential pressure type instead of gauge pressure GP or absolute pressure AP Last eight columns in bottom row are blank when no tag number has been assigned to this transmitter Go to Step 8 DE XMT R TAG oars bikes HREHZNENEBEBESHEER Transmitter is in digital DE transmission mode Last eight OR columns in bottom row are blank when no tag number has been assigned to this transmitter Go to Step 7 j SSE SE Communication error messages are cycled at two second intervals and display returns to initial prompt Go to Step 6 6 There is a communication problem Correct any wiring resistance or check the power supply problems and try power and SFC connections Is the communicating again Press ID polarity correct red to positive and key black to negative If you are still not getting the loop resi
7. 237 B 1 Possible Solutions Metliods uu x uu L u ne et p Heu ede m RU p Eee Pu RR TED AMOR RA 237 APPENDIX C CONFIGURATION RECORD 251 APPENDIX D HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS REFERENCE 253 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations sss 253 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations 259 0 3 Enclosure Ratings une etie ete eae etae ek Eee tno o qapa 263 INDEX S uksi MR EM LC IM I IT 265 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual vii Figures Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter eese eren 2 Figure2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode 3 Figure3 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation 4 Figure 4 Typical SFC Communication Interface n 8 Figure5 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components eene 11 Figure 6 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option sess eene 14 Figure7 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation eene 19 Figure8 Typi
8. 121 Figure 38 Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant Current Source Mode 127 Figure 39 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter 128 Figure 40 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter 131 Figure 41 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank au aa sS ua e rennes 133 Figure 42 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized Tank esee eene nene 136 Figure 43 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type 140 Figure 44 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP TypeTransmitter 140 Figure 45 Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter 144 Figure 46 Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter 144 Figure 47 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter 145 viii ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Figures Figure 48 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter with Remote
9. 147 Figure 49 Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper PWA sssseseseeeeeeeeeen rennen ener enne 156 Figure 50 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function eene 159 Figure 51 Display With All Indicators Lit nennen enne nennen trennen nre 163 Figure 52 Typical Calibration H ek p soiree tenete erre eR etel iocis 191 Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference seen 210 Figure54 ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference 211 Figure 55 Series 100 900 Electronics Housing Electronics Meter End 212 Figure 56 Series 100 900 Electronics Housing Terminal Block End eee 212 Figure 57 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp STD930 C D G Kand Land STOI errotaren a dete ERE ERA UE REO lO RE po EH EE Steves apana 214 Figure 58 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 amp STD930 A B E and J 217 Figure 59 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter 219 Figure 60 Series 900 Dual Head GP Meter Bodies ssssssssssssssseseeeeeenere nennen nnne nnns 221 Figure 61 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body sss 222 Figure 62 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body
10. Procedure The procedure in Table 21 shows how to enter a sample tag number of PT 3011 into the transmitter s configuration database Table 21 Entering Tag Number Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 DE READ ING TT T TT Ti Be sure any switches that may trip T R 1 5 SECURED alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off This prompt only appears for transmitters in analog mode 2 NON VOL miale No T T T TT 1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured WoRK ING T and establish transmitter Yes communications it N p P TA ATTENTION This procedure EEE EE EERE also applies for transmitters in DE mode The prompt may show DE XMTR instead of output form and transmitter type in top row if you have not established communications as previously described in Section 5 2 of this manual 2 NUR EIN T ple INIO J Put SFC keyboard into alpha mode ALPHA I J IT Tl Activates alphabetic characters in upper right hand corner of keys 3 ET ITN T ole Itale INO T Key in P T and space as first Il jll l PEI TT jJ characters in tag number lll l 1111 SCR PAD DP TAG ll ep j P 4 NUM is pr Take SFC keyboard out of alpha ALPHA IT pepe kh eet TIT TTT mode and put it into numeric mode Continued on next page 72 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User
11. Ws sign segment A Set sign segment BLANK for positive to minus sign for values negative values Set magnitude range 19 99 199 9 1999 19 99K 199 9K 1999K 19990K A v Set active digit value 0 to 9 122 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 13 Disconnecting SFC Considerations e Be sure a character does not appear on the right side of the SFC display indicating that the transmitter may be in its current output mode or the SFC has detected a non critical status condition ERM Example 18 1 9 9 9 If the character is on the display press the output key and then the CLR key to remove the transmitter from the current output mode or press the stat key to check the operating status of the transmitter INPUT J SIT TT T IPFT E Example 1 877 s TFI SEL PTT FT E E rz ISL LLLLL CLR 1 E THELT e sure to store all changes in the transmitters non volatile memory by pressing the SHIFT key and then the ENTER key _ E le isini xample NON VOL ENTER PITI sporty ay MSS 15 Kj Nic IE IN ipp PTI sporty ty JN O N V OL JA T 3011 L E ET T 1 1 WARNING e Bes
12. 193 Clearing the Symbol from the SFC Display n n nasa 197 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non Critical Failures eee 199 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures nn 200 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors eseeeeeeeenne 200 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry Errors esee 201 Summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC Display sssssssseseeeeeeeeen nennen 201 a Status Check With SEG ente RIT IT NI ees 202 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table nn eene 203 Running SFC Display and Keyboard Test sssssssssssseeeeeeeeneen eene 207 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference sse 211 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 55 and 56 213 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 nemen 215 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 58 ene 218 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59 219 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body 220 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60 sse eene 221 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 61 enne 222 Parts Identification for Callouts in Fig
13. Ora EA ES EC EE v EC Ae E iu EA ES Ei RE ERN Ee 4 K2 uniti rex qawaq Vent Plug PED UEHEMENTER ER e E EROR 2 uc cent Vent Bushing eee eene 2 Meterbody Gasket Kits 51452865 001 Meterbody Gasket Kit PTFE Material Kit includes 51452865 002 Meterbody Gasket Kit Viton Material Kit includes EUR EIE TER Gasket Process Head e 6 C 2222 CPC Gasket Flange Adapter eee 6 KZ etnies O Ring Meterbody to Electronics Housing sss 3 Process Head Gasket Kits K6 51452868 001 Gasket only Process Head 12 PTFE Gaskets pack 12 51452868 002 Gasket only Process Head 6 Viton Head O Rings 6 51452868 007 Gasket only Process Head Graphite Gasket use only as replacement 6 of existing graphite gasket 4of8 34 ST 99 22 Addendum to 33 ST 25 14 10 04 Key Part Number Description Qty No Unit Flange Adapter Gasket Kits Ka 51452868 004 Gasket only Flange Adapter 6 PTFE Adapter Gaskets 6 Ka 51452868 005 Gasket only Flange Adapter 6 VITON Adapter O Rings 6 Ka 51452868 0078 Gasket only Flange Adapter Graphite Gasket use only as 6 replacement of existing graphite gasket 2 inch NPT Flange Adapter Kits Flange Adapter Kit with 51452867 110 SS Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts 51452867 210 SS Flange Adapters and with A286 SS NACE bolts 51452867 310 SS Flange Adapters and with 316 SS non NACE bolts 51452867 410 SS Flange
14. Continued on next page 130 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 SHIFT INPUT OUT PUT Q m T 71 RECT NON VOL ENTER Yes Su rp N Pur 1 PIT 391141 SPE GEI GR GS LAE T UN PUT 1 PIT 3911 15501 EAT SIS N rr erro 3911 FERO N Pur 1 39111 SPE MRIN AT ANPUT 1 PIT 3211 PUNT Pur 1 Jejr sona 1191984121 2 0 _ 139 Initiate shift key selection Read applied input pressure Prompt asks if the applied input pressure equals zero input If it is zero input go to next keystroke If it is not press CLR key to exit function and try again Zero input is set equal to applied input pressure 10 Repeat Steps 6 to 8 11 Close equalizer valve C 12 Open valve B and LP block off valve to begin measuring process differential pressure 13 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to applied input pressure If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreig
15. PUT Ou rp 1 PT spol s 4 Present out i i put signal level in FT Pr ele TT LII percent 20 Exit constant current source mode CLR NO Su TP 1 sF L IN PT 188 ST 3000 Release 300 SFC Model 575103 User s Manual 6 05 10 4 Calibrating Range with SFC Background Procedure ATTENTION The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter has two point calibration This means when you calibrate two points in the calibration range all the points in that range adjust to that calibration The procedure in Table 58 shows the steps for calibrating a differential pressure DP type transmitter to a range of 0 to 200 inH2O for example purposes This procedure assumes that the transmitter is removed from the process and located in a controlled environment You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0 0496 or better to do a range calibration Note that we factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of water ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39 2 F 4 C Table 58 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect power supply and SFC to See Figure 52 for typical SFC signal terminals on transmitter s terminal power supply and pressure source block Connect a calibration standard hookup
16. 1449 650 A LOOP RESISTANCE 250 10 8 25 425 OPERATING VOLTAGE ACAD m 30753607 C I DO NOT SCALE DRAWING Honeywell Ka _ 30753607 SCALE NONE REV 4 DATEO7 07 00 2 OF 2 SATI Iv2vO2 31130v2 DNIAVSI 3 IVOS LON OC SI LI HOIHA 3004 LWHL NYHL I v d v 0 Z I C HSINLI 3sUdBnd ANY SD TISN 38 LON 1 NV 3ON3ILJNDO cal GEES st Suet A NU Gi3INNVID ATddNS LY CXINnUNO CT3IHS SNUILVOLlddw NEA ONS E E gt SNIAVST ID31ND3 enum JHL 0 JTIILAY OL Add 300419373 GNNOYD 338V1IfS V OL 3193NNUJ 38 gt 001S 006S 000 15 HONI AW3NIT SM3INBNVS N3N32 SNLVAVddY C31VIOUSSV 3197051 ATIWIINVATVS NON 8 IN3AdIQO3 SIHL DNITIV1SNI N3HA B ens Q3AUTIUJ 38 1 ONIAVSOI NOILVTIWLSNI SAFSNLIVANNYW SNLYAYddY C3lvIQUSSV 4 C3ADSddY OS 3I NUILVOU 0314155912 SNOGAVZVH 2 NOISIAIC I 5579 NI GATIWLSNI 38 AVW snlvavddv 0319190559 MIADAddY JAWA 38 LSNW shlvsvddv C3lVIOUSSV 9 CWwAUBNddV JAWA LNOLIA G3llIWH3d SI ONIAVAC SIHL OL NOISIAZY UN WI 000 ywi s us g9 eld VSI ISNV NV x A Doe ISSUE EE 04 VdJN ISNV PIN IHL 30 YOS STOI
17. Smart Meter SM 3000 Smart Meter Connections The smart meter 3 wires can be connected remotely to a Release 300 transmitter Section 13 in this manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting this smart meter to Release 300 transmitters New Smart Meter with Local Zero and Span New Smart Meter Connections The new integral smart meter 8 wires is connected directly to the transmitter s PWA and is mounted to the electronics module assembly inside the electronics housing The new integral smart meter is designed for the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitter and provides functionality not available with other smart meter designs NOTE Only one smart meter should be installed integrally to the transmitter Be aware that the RMA 300 remote meter does not have custom and flow units capability like the new smart meter Therefore if you use a local smart meter that is configured to display readings in custom or flow units in conjunction with an RMA 300 remote meter the readings of the two meters will be in different units 48 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 49 Section 5 Getting Started 5 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Establishing Communications Making Initial Checks Changing Mode of Operation About this secti
18. 4 CLR to exit function NEXT key to call up next parameter 4 CLR Dle efoIN rF Plt Prompt asks if change entered in NO LIOJA D SFC is to be downloaded to transmitter If you want to download change go to Step 5 If you do not want to download change press CLR key to exit function This action only applies when Step 3 is valid Otherwise this keystroke exits DE CONF function 5 NON VOL ole PIT Message exchange is working ENTER sle LT I es fo e elt tloa Parameter change is loaded JRIEJAIDIYI 1 11 transmitter SFC is ready for next function Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 93 6 9 Keystroke summary Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only continued Figure 33 shows keystroke summary for selecting the mode of output signal indication for transmitter in DE mode for quick reference Keystroke Summary for Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication DE CONF a MENU SHIFT ITEM DE CONF MENU gt ITEM NON VOL NON VOL ENTER 22513 R 2 94 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 10 Selecting Message Format DE Mode Only Background You can select one of these broadcast formats for the digital signal transmissio
19. Le ONY Sanaa AnD NIWSWHO 00 X WAS2 6781 6 y4 S9N3 19M 30 ALaad0Yd JHL SI CNIWDSWHO 00 CXVWDADE VSO 34VS ATIVIISNISLNI WNI 0 ONIAVA SIHL 30 LHIIXAJ0I IHL HS ONIAVAC JUN1NDO Vs H 99 OM SH3l3WVsvd ONIMOVIO4 JHL JAY SATLINVAVd WHO LIOA HLIIA Sa3INNVE JI et 0015 0065 000 IS 4605 or HONS ABT HONI IANSYIW AV3NIT TD XNAIDNYC NON 3NDIS3Q 153 IN3W33994dNW3 1 INO s3BnssV s ankauogy gt e KL S SSES ANYANDI 31 XIANDO IN3HdIn63 1 N31193NNDO31 3 INVAV 28 05 DUY i L aan NDISU1dX3 0 3NOSIY IN3W3SSIISJAV 38 LSAW S 0235 S39NVH23 ONI333NION3 ShDONVZVH NUN 38 OL NAON SI 93 JHL X0 440 G3HOLIMS WI 000 S s aaus INSWNOOT NUIIVOIJIIS32 N338 SVH 3ADd SS37NQ IN3WdInO3 L123NNDOSIT LON DG 5 GaVZVH NDISU1dX3 DNINSVA 000 6 5 Caren 5919292 y 5 4S SONINSVA DNIADT113 3Hl 3AS3S8D Sa3IaMaVvg 1 11 SNOILVTIVISNI 2 AIC NI IT 8 sieeus 000 vwd Siaeus e NULLOITSISOC ONIAVH ALIXOHLNY NULLO3dSNI W907 3Hl OL 378V1d329V SV 3009 TWOINI2313 NVIQVNV2 Yad LINGNOD IDIA 0 NOILO3NNUO X04 NDISIAUSd HLIM 000 5 2 4S WS 000 VWa 2 S 3 uS FANSOTONA JJAYLINS V JU TIVA JHL HORUBHI YO NI T3TTVISNI NIHA 2 8 V WS 000 9 s us ys3 ejos Amooisula4uD I s us ZAIT I SSV129 NI SN3INaVg8 IDDHIIA NULIVTTISNI N03 318V1In
20. TT step ety riii F S DIR U 5 pin PT jll ATTENTION Sou c n s F e T KE INIS E E LLL change the default failsafe direction from upscale to F S D IR PT 3011 7 5 lu PisiCIA LEE downscale See Changing default failsafe direction in this section s DIR 3011 IF SAFE D 5 next page 154 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 8 2 Procedure continued Accessing Operation Data continued Table 46 continued Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access IF you want to view THEN use these keystrokes the present temperature 5 C measured by circuitry in the transmitter s sensor ATTENTION yoy can change the temperature engineering units to F R or K by pressing the UNITS key to select and then the CONF key to return to the temperature display CONF I g ul z j 2 n d NON VOL m z E m Yes cCoNri6 iro R MII ST C OINIF I G Iml elt lelr Clo nl tl i al L e pues pepper En BEVEL ERE Saas 11 ee present message in the scratch pad area of memory SHIFT B SCR PAD D NEXT LIN story ll il s e R Plajo IPT 3011 EP INI E T
21. 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 60 Series 900 Dual Head GP Meter Bodies Table 75 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads GP models 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 K1 30757506 001 Head bolts carbon steel 3 8 inch 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 001 Head bolts stainless steel NACE 3 8 inch 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 002 Process Head Bolting 3 8 UNC 316 SS Non NACE 4 Kit Includes Process Head Bolts and Nuts K2 30757501 001 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Head with side vents Head dummy CS Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent Plug Gasket 30757501 002 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Head without side vents Head dummy CS Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent Plug Gasket 30757502 001 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head dummy SS Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757502 002 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head dummy SS Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30756941 005 Stainless steel blind reference head HR option K3 30757505 001T Process head gasket kit Kit includ
22. Zones Within IEC7 10 hazardous locations are categorized into one of these three zones Description of Hazardous Location Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously or is present for long periods Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation and if it does occur it will exist for a short period only IEC Groups Flammable gases vapors and mists are further classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most easily ignitable mixture within air Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres it may be used within as follows Description of Atmosphere Atmospheres containing acetylene hydrogen fuel and combustible process gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as ethyl ether ethylene or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as acetone benzene butane cyclopropane ethanol gasoline hexane methanol methane natural gas naphtha propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 259 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations continued IEC Methods of The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use Protection in given locations Protection Concept Permitted Use Flameproof Zone 1 amp 2 C
23. 20 mA loop L Fa zi Modular Electronics Terminal Block Pressure Series and model Honeywell s line of ST 3000 Smart Transmitters includes these two number data series designations e Series 100 e Series 900 Each series includes several models to meet various process pressure measurement and interface requirements Each transmitter comes with a nameplate located on the top of the electronics housing that lists its given model number The model number format consists of a Key Number with several Table selections as shown below S 3 e as S S Y A o lt Q AU xO amp QS NS e X lt Q lt Key Number Table Table Il Table Ill Table IV SIrbIMGlol E1GIH flololole Sle NE x x x x Continued on next page 4 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Series and model number data continued ATTENTION Transmitter adjustments ST 3000 Transmitters presently available You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you have from the third and fourth digits in the key number The letter in the third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types A Absolute Pressure D Differential Pressure F Flange Mounted G Gauge Pressure R Remote Seals The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter Series Thus a 1 means t
24. 34 ST 99 35 6 04 ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Addendum Release 300 and Smart Field to User s Manual Communicator Model STS 103 34 ST 25 14 Overview ATEX Directive 94 6 EC The ATEX Directive 94 6 EC is a European CE Mark directive concerning products that are designed for use in potentially explosive environments This New Approach directive is based on and is an expansion of European Norms EN CENELEC standards On June 30 2003 the ATEX ATmospheres EXplosibles directive will replace directives currently in effect and from that time only products with the ATEX certification and with ATEX labeling will be approved for free movement in the EU European Union and EFTA European Free Trade Association countries As defined in the directive free movement refers to placing a product on the market and or placing a product into service The ATEX Directive 94 6 EC is a living set of document s subject to further change and refinement whose details are beyond the scope of this addendum Further information can be obtained in the Official Journal of the European Communities No L100 1 and in related publications such as Guidelines on the Application of Directive 94 9 EC Both of these items are available at http europa eu int comm enterprise atex index htm Products that have been previously certified under the EN and CENELEC European Norms and which comply fully with all standard
25. I LT sit G Output conformity is changed in ICON IFO RIMI TY transmitter Press NEXT key to call up next parameter or CLR key to exit function Continued on next page 74 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 6 4 Selecting Output Form continued Keystroke summary About square root output Figure 27 shows keystroke summary for selecting output conformity for quick reference Figure 27 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity B CONF NON VOL ENTER Yes DE CONF ITEM NON VOL ENTER Yes NON VOL ENTER Yes 22507 For differential pressure transmitters measuring the pressure drop across a primary element the flow rate is directly proportional to the square root of the differential or pressure drop The ST 3000 transmitter s output is automatically converted to equal percent of flow when its output conformity is configured as square root You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for comparison purposes S e 100 P pan Where AP Il Differential pressure input in engineering units Span Transmitter s measurement span URV LRV Pressure input in percent of span P Therefore A HE 100 Flow And you can use the following formula to determine the corresponding current output in milliamperes direct current Flow 16 4
26. Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 6 IR YE 1 T T Bonga Read present LRV setting 0 09000 2 _ 39 Prompt asks if you want to set LRV SET LR v tt PT joa to applied pressure NON VOL LRV is set to fixed reference leg RV 1 PT 3011 i if i pressure H2 times specific gravity of gu BERGE ORE remote seal fill fluid and 1 for pressure on low side of meter body 7 eT olore 1 Call up output for display OUT sF el WwiojRIK I ING L 1 TL T 1 17 13 2111 Read 0 output on display for iB Jee corresponding empty tank pressure plus reference pressure H2 For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 0 output 8 If you Then can not fill tank go to Step 9 can fill tank go to Step 10 9 Key in URV that is equal to full tank You can use these formulas to pressure See section 6 7 in this manual calculate URV in inH2O for details on keying in a range value Span H1xS Go to Step 12 H1 Height of variable head in inches S Specific gravity of measured liquid URV Span LRV Example If H1 equaled 10 feet the measured liquid was water and the LRV equaled 135 36 inH2O substituting into the formulas yields Span 10 ft x 12 in x 1 00 Span 120 inH2O URV 120 inH2O 135 3
27. rer Display shows current transmitter E 5 1 output e T it aU every PUT six seconds Be sure to time your 1 PT next press with updated z yp p 321142 T 1111 display 5 2 7 T jetty Boil Key in 0 zero as desired output le l LL I ILL signal level in percent 6 NON VOL Put transmitter into constant current ENTER 5 wonR K ING source mode as noted by sign in Yes display and set output to 0 Pu TP 1 Bonal lol oo Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 185 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal continued Procedure continued Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 RESET olur i T felt Calibrate output signal to 0 K stele 1 301114 CIO R R E CIT 2 8 Check that milliammeter or voltmeter reani Iam kory If reading is Then correct go to Step 11 lower than 4mA go to Step 9 or 1V higher than go to Step 10 4mA or 1V 9 A olur 1 T Gradually raise output to 4mA or 1V NEXT PIN CE 1 JcjoluiNiTIs reading Repeat this Step as required eUT P 1 3011114 Sir ic wo Rk Nie EE gg Ou TP
28. Procedure continued Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Step Action 6 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti seize compound such as Neverseize or equivalent 7 Replace process head or heads and bolts Finger tighten nuts 8 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration Tighten head bolts in stages of 1 3 full torque 2 3 full torque and then full torque Always tighten head bolts in EE sequence shown and in these 1 3 stages 1 1 3 full torque A 2 2 3 full torque 3 Full torque 4 2 9 Return transmitter to service CAUTION po not exceed the overload rating when placing the transmitter back into service or during cleaning operations See Overpressure ratings in Section 3 of this manual Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 173 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Torque ratings Table 54 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type Table 54 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings Meter Body Process Head Bolting Type Type Boling Size Carbon Steel B7M Bolting Stainless Steel NACE 316 Stainless Steel Standard no option B7 Option CR Option Non NACE SS specified Option DraftRange 7 16x 14UNC 2
29. Table 4 Start up Tasks Reference Task Description Reference Section 1 Put analog loop into manual Appropriate vendor documentation mode for controller or recorder used as a receiver in analog loop with ST 3000 transmitter 2 Connect SFC to transmitter and 5 2 establish communications 3 Check or set tag ID 6 3 4 Identify transmitter s mode of 5 3 operation 5 Change mode of operation if 5 4 required 6 Check set output form 6 4 Linear Square Root 7 Check set damping time 6 5 8 Check set Lower Range Value 6 7 See 6 8 for local zero and and Upper Range Value span adjustments 9 Run optional output check for 7 3 analog loop 10 Check zero input and set if 7 4 See Step 9 in Table 39 required 7 8 See Step 9 in Table 43 11 Check transmitter status 8 2 12 Setup local Smart Meter if 6 11 or 6 12 applicable 13 Write data in scratch pad 8 4 memory if desired 14 Store all changes in the 6 13 transmitter s non volatile memory by pressing SHIFT and ENTER 16 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section 3 Preinstallation Considerations 3 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction CE Conformity Europe Notice Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter Considerations for SFC Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option About this section This section reviews things you should take into consideration before
30. ALON A lddfis 310 I1N3NdID93 1041 09 lt ALON ATddNS aaMod NDIILVODL I SNOCSVZVH NON SNIAVEC 3 9S LON DT V 63r INS 0 8 55 wweroers gt Donon DATE Teeb0 i JTW AW OOEVWA TSCOW 33138 OO IWNY NUILdDU 33134 3l0W3e 0008VNW2 JAW 00 VWel 006 001 S3IN3S 000 1S cit DNISIA 3l1VN231 IV 006 001 S3IN3S YALLINSNVYL O00 1S T ONISIA 3lVN231 IV 3A 00 VW 2 31UND FITTV dnuss T NOISIAIG HI I I SS 19 NLIIIVOL KI3IdISSV 19 SfIDIGelvZVH lt 9 SALON QI3183ANIO H3IRRIVED SNLVAVdd 2319190559 C3A0edd ALILIN3 29343 lt 9 SALON 3183AN02 43DhIVED SNLVAVdd 2319190559 C3AU ddv ALLLIN3 JAW LN3WdINOS WAaLNOD ALON A lddris 33A Ud 310ND LNAWdINOS 105 1 09 lt 31UND AlddNs 33A Ud NLITIVOL SfIDIGelVZVH NLN ONIAVAC 37595 LON 0M V DAG F 1F2F02 ut 311J31V2 640 t 1HS 00 90 01319T I 37925 1 EX Euo dW NDILdU 8313W val 3lNI 31DN 1N3Nd1I083 4 3 9 SALON C318 3ANDO 83ISelvVa LI ADSL ENDO Snivavddv T31VIOUSSV MOTT3A 3AU3ddV ALILIN3 2344 31UN5 YaMOd 006 001 S3IN3S YALLINSNVAL 00015 2 ALON 43 00 8 9 dua T
31. sic R AT C H Plan 10 Sal i Pi Io N sic R Arc H 2 1 the PROM serial number O Ei B Ty ul I z 4 z ge ps z o gt TT 2 ESI ul s G elon TTT ST C OINIF I G t le r Clolni t il gl sr 5 ITiE M PI s sr 1 5 7 5 12 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 SFC Model 575103 User s Manual 55 8 3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction Background Analog and DE mode differences ATTENTION Procedure A Transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale This means that the transmitter s output will be driven upscale maximum output when the transmitter detects a critical status You can change the direction from upscale to downscale minimum output by cutting jumper W1 on the Printed Wiring Assembly PWA If your transmitter is operating in the analog mode an upscale failsafe action will drive the transmitter s output to greater than 21 mA or a downscale action will drive its output to less than 3 8 mA If your transmitter is operating in the DE mode an upscale failsafe action will cause the transmitter to generate a infinity digital signal or a downscale failsafe action will cause it to generate a infinity digital signal The STIMV IOP module interprets eith
32. to applied pressure If you don t want to set LRV press CLR key to exit function Otherwise go to Step 4 4 NON VOL Message exchange is working ENTER 5 I ILIR VI J P lili Applied LRV setting stored in 121 8ls 7 7 2 _ 3 9 transmitter s working memory 5 Apply known input pressure to transmitter that represents URV for 10096 20 mAdc output 6 F FUTRIVI HT T Ph 0 Present URV setting Pressure for 100 47 813171 u 2 o s e r 20 mAdc 100 output 7 G uR v HT T T ety Biona Prompt asks if you want to set URV SET Is ET JuiRIvi to applied pressure If you don t want to set URV press cLR key to exit function Otherwise go to Step 8 8 NON VOL Message exchange is working ENTER STF iC 0 es 1 T T PTT Belona Applied URV setting stored in j sisr MjSl2 transmitter s working memory Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 83 6 7 Setting Range Values Using SFC Continued Procedure 2 continued Table 26 Setting LRV and to Applied Pressures continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 uR VI fay T T PETI slept 1 Initiates shift key selection FL LELLEIPDEBE EELL NON VOL data in transmitter s non RMP TP ey Saves Yes strict EET TL volatile memory This takes approximately 8 secon
33. Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model Differential E STD1xx STD9xx Pressure Differential Pressure STF1xx with Flange on One Side Dual Head Gauge Not Available Pressure In Line Gauge and E STG1xL E STG9xL Absolute Pressure STA1xL STA9xL Gauge and Absolute E STG1xx STG9xx Pressure STA1xx STA9xx Continued on next page 6 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Table 1 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family continued Transmitter Type Series 100 Model Series 900 Model Flange Mount STF1xx STF9xx Liquid Level Differential Pressure B STR1xx with Remote Diaphragm Seals Not Available STG93P High Temperature STG14T Not Available STF14T 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 7 1 3 Smart Field Communicator About SFC communications Purpose of SFC The portable battery powered SFC serves as the common communication interface device for Honeywell s family of Smartline Transmitters It communicates with a transmitter through serial digital signals over the 4 to 20 milliampere line used to power the transmitter A request response format is the basis for the communication operation The t
34. Housing Local Smart Meter Option 14 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section 2 Quick Start Reference 2 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page 2 1 Introduction 2 2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On Line Quickly About this section This section assumes that the ST 3000 transmitter has been installed and wired correctly and is ready to be put into operation It also assumes that you are somewhat familiar with using the SFC and that the transmitter has been configured correctly for your application If the transmitter has not been installed and wired you are not familiar with SFC operation and or you do not know if the transmitter is configured correctly please read the other sections of this manual before starting up your transmitter This section provides a list of typical start up tasks and tells you where you can find detailed information about performing the task 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 15 2 2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On Line Quickly Quick start up tasks Table 4 lists common start up tasks for an ST 3000 transmitter using an SFC and gives an appropriate section In this manual to reference for more information about how to do the task The start up tasks are listed in the order they are commonly completed
35. 19 3 4 Considerations for SFC nasa ns 22 3 5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option I a 24 SECTION 4 INSTALLATION 25 4 Introduction ih cii ee 25 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmiltter 4 ee Dee er eae Ra rea a 26 4 3 Piping S T 3000 Transmiltter u ete te e RE EHI E C EROR t EH eos 38 44 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter uu rre ate e bg e ea cde 43 SECTION 5 GETTING STARTED 50 S Introductionc RR le D Ra EE ERR A a 50 5 2 Establishing Communications sss nennen enne nennen nennen 51 5 3 Making Initial Checks eee med cei ed ai i Rer 55 54 Changing Mode of Operation seseriai iiaea E REAA E EE nennen 58 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 SFC Model STS103 User s Manual Table of Contents SECTION 6 CONFIGURATION u 60 6 1 Introduction n s l ha Sun 60 6 27 QVeIVISW 61 06 3 Entering a Tag NUM GMs L asada saan HERR RI RENE ERE ERE BERE ER BEER Re ea reu des 72 6
36. 4 fep Hit o Continued on next page 158 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 8 4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area continued Procedure continued ENTER Yes OR scRAT c H Papp EU NEU te E P P ee Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 A sIefRIATT e H Pla o PTT T Return to first group of 16 JON Ir zs characters 8 M Pla TT T T Move cursor to 10th character 3 164 chere Tem qr Praes 9 SEC VAR PTT T Change 3 to 6 to reflect revised T se eva POINT 151712121798 calibration date 10 sicir PAO TIT Save changes in message IST wm perte p E c RIA T C H A 1 T 2 2 71915 T CLR IN DP PT Exit scratch pad without saving NO READY ii changes in message 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 159 8 5 Background Figure 50 Saving and Restoring a Database If it ever became necessary to replace a damaged transmitter with a spare you could save the configuration database from the damaged transmitter to the HOLD memory in the SFC and then restore the saved configuration database from the HOLD memory in the spare transmitter In fact you could restore the saved configuration database in any number of transmitters as lo
37. 4 C318 3ANDO 23ISel V8 WaLNo3 Snivavddv Q31VIODSSV G3IJILS32 959 ALON l ATddNS WS O0EVWS zm a 3 Ud 2 31DN SSV12 9 4 3 dNOYD I SSv13 q 0 V dn sD I ssv19 006 001 31435 3n83SNIMAINI 31I80238 34VS ATIVIISNIALNI 1 3 000615 NOILVYOO 1 031351557 19 SNUCSVZVH NUILVOU SNUGAYZYH NUN vel EI TT 6 8 uN Z 3 S m Ij Ir DNIAVSK 3W39S LUN DG V 630 carso 9 TIWOS evevuers 4 oas one 006 001 531435 YALLINSNVYL 000615 T ONIAIM IV 9 SILON ZA QI3L83ANOO U3IIIVED snivealvddv 2319190559 CHLI WSO AW O0EVWd 31UN III 55910 9 413 dNOYD I 5579 q 2 v dnuag I SSVI 3n03SNIMINI 31D4023S 349 ATTOISNISLINI 9IX3 NOILVOOT 1415 19 SfIDIGelv ZVH NDUTIVOL DAC L ever0d 3713099 00 40 40 Ivov 3LON INSWdINOS IDSINUS 3LUN A ddns s 3 Ud ZVH NLIN 3795 LON WV DAG 8 2vevO2 3114301V2 630 8 LHS 00 90 01 3190 3 A33 37995 00 40 40 avav ey ANAS 0 1 4 ESSO gt t H H NOILdO aslaw IS9lD31NI g Al SH P O gt 31DN LNaWdINOA 4 3 9 SILON 3 ZA C I3L
38. 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 29 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued ATTENTION Precautions for Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans The mounting position of a model STA122 STA922 STA12L or STA92L Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a model STD110 Draft Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter spans become smaller A maximum zero shift of 2 5 mm Hg for an absolute transmitter or 1 5 inH20 for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting position which is rotated 90 degrees from vertical A typical zero shift of 0 12 mm Hg or 0 20 in H20 can occur for a 5 degree rotation from vertical To minimize these positional effects on calibration zero shift take the appropriate mounting precautions that follow for the given transmitter model For a model STA122 STA922 STA12L or STA92L transmitter you must ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it You do this by leveling the transmitter side to side and front to back See Figure 9 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance Figure 9 Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter Leveling Absolute Pressure models Process Head Position spirit balance on center section of meter body only Cont d Continued on next page 30 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual
39. AW O0E VWs 006 001 531435 SL 9H 9 x33 S YALLINSNVYL 000 1S NUILVOLU 1 NUILVOU SNAUCSVZVH NON g v1 I TT OT e 8 v 2 E I 2 Evev0elS SNIAVAC 37995 LON DG Y 9Aq Z EvevOZIS 3TILJIVO L30 Z 195 Ne 3 A38 3NUN FWS ey EORR Sexo GW NOILdO 3138 19493 006 001 531035 YALLINSNVYL 00015 SL OH 9 x33 NUILVOU SfllldaVvZVvH ME GI3L83AND2 83TISeIVE 31DN LNAWdINGS S v SALON snlvavddy 31919055 Gal 311039 3313N33 ALON Adds 33A Ud NUILVOLU 1 SflllddVvZVH NLIN Appendix Table Ill Options in Model Number A 1 Table Ill Options Reference Codes and The following table lists available Table III options alphabetically and descriptions numerically by their codes and gives a brief description of the options Note that restrictions do apply based on other as built transmitter characteristics and some options are mutually exclusive If Code 15 Then transmitter option is A 1 2 inch NPT to M20 316 stainless steel conduit adapter A2 1 2 inch NPT to 3 4 inch NPT 316 stainless steel conduit adapter B1 or B2 Blind DIN stainless steel adapter flanges mounted with NACE bolts on process head Blind DIN stainless steel adapter fanges moun
40. Manually update non volatile memory with each parameter R v ep sert Requesting transmitter to correct or set its URV toa value which results in too small a span or correct its LRV or URV while in output mode Keystroke is not valid for given transmitter Check that correct URV calibration pressure is being applied to transmitter or that transmitter is not in output mode e Check that keystroke is applicable for given transmitter Not enough resistance in series with communication loop Check sensing resistor and increase resistance to at least 2500 row jtjojo P REIS STA Tulsi OR 5 s p v Pressure input is two times greater than URL of transmitter Check range and if required replace transmitter with one that has a wider range Meter body may have been damaged Check the transmitter for accuracy and linearity Replace meter body and recalibrate if needed 3 0 1 1 r Electronics PWA meter body are incompatible Obtain matching meter body for given transmitter model and series Check transmitter nameplate for model number data sira rus IRiE s PIoNIS E Transmitter sent a negative response b
41. Number Symbol Clearing 197 Operation Data Accessing 153 Output Conformity 64 Keystroke Summary 75 Selecting 74 Smart Meter setup 98 Output Mode Running Analog Output Check 26 Output Signal Indication DE Mode Only 65 Output Signal Mode DE Only Selecting 92 Keystroke Summary 94 Ranges 92 Parameters Configuration 64 Piping 38 Potential Noise Sources 79 Power Supply Voltage Operating Range 43 Pressure Measurement AP Starting Up 146 Pressure Measurement DP Starting Up 132 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement GP Starting Up 141 145 Pressure Ratings 21 Process Connections Summary 40 PWA Replacing 175 R Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Mounting 36 Replacement parts 209 S Save and Restore Database 160 Procedure 761 Scratch Pad Area Writing Data 158 Sealing Liquid 237 SFC Connecting to Transmitter 51 Disconnecting 123 Display Characteristics 7 Model Designations 9 Purpose 8 SM 3000 Smart Meter connections 48 Smart Meter See Local Smart Meter Smartline Configuration Toolkit 1 Solution Support Center xiii Square Root Output 75 Dropout 76 Selecting 74 ST 3000 Smart Transmitter 2 Startup Procedure Reference 25 Start Up Tasks Reference 16 Status Check Running 202 Steam Heating 244 Superheated Steam 249 Tag Number 64 Entering Procedure 72 Keystroke Summary 73 Temperature Limits Operating 20 Transmitter mounting Models STA122
42. TTT T T Be sure any switches that may trip 2 TR P s JSEC UREJD alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 NON VOL 1L TT 1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER 5 and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 LIN DP Taaje No B n 4 See Figure 48 for sample piping If you Then arrangement can not empty go to Step 5 tank can empty tank go to Step 6 5 Key in LRV that is equal to empty tank You can use this formula to pressure See section 6 7 in this manual calculate LRV in inH2O for details on keying in a range value LRV H2 x S x 4 Go to Step 8 H2 Height of fixed reference leg in inches S Specific gravity of remote seal fill fluid 1 Required for LRV calculation since pressure is on low side of meter body Example If H2 equaled 12 feet and the fill fluid was silicone oil substituting into the formula yields LRV 12 ft x 12 in x 0 94 x 1 LRV 135 36 inH2O ATTENTION The specific gravity of silicone oil fill fluid is 0 94 and florolube fill fluid is 1 84 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 149 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals continued Procedure continued
43. jsjujs P ejc T iNIP U T THEN cpu bP PT por v READ Y LL Transmitter and SFC are operating normally Diagnostic message appears for detected fault Critical status appears followed by applicable diagnostic messages Signals end of status messages for display Press STAT key to display messages again When there are two or more messages they are cycled in display at 5 second intervals 202 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 11 6 Interpreting Messages Interpretation table Most of the diagnostic messages that can be displayed on the SFC are listed in alphabetical order in Table 67 along with a description and suggested action to be taken Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table Message Possible Cause What to Do 5 5 Plt a o 1 1 Characterization PROM is not Replace meter body PIR OM j FjAju L T functioning correctly 5 0 5 Pit 301118 All calibration CORRECTS were Recalibrate transmitter E C T S IRIE S EITI deleted and data was reset to default values U T P 1 P T 3 0 1 1 No temperature compensation Effect will be minor degradation of E L JE C T RJOJN T 5 lt sIA gt data exists for calculations ambient temperature influence specifications Replace electronics module PWA O U T P 1 P T 3 0 1 1 Transmitter
44. mA dc Output Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 75 6 4 Selecting Output Form continued About square root Example Ifyou have a differential pressure transmitter with a range of output continued 0 to 100 inches of water with an input of 49 inches of water substituting into the above formulas yields 49 100 100 49 49 Al am 100 70 Flow and 70 16 4 15 2 mA dc Output Square root dropout avoid unstable output at readings near zero the ST 3000 transmitter automatically drops square root conformity and changes to linear conformity for low differential pressure readings As shown in Figure 28 the dropout point is between 0 4 and 0 5 of differential pressure input depending on direction Figure 28 Square Root Dropout Points Output Flow mA dc of Span 6 4 15 Differential Pressure Full Scale 22508 76 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 5 Adjusting Damping Time Background ATTENTION You can adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise We suggest that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for your process The electrical noise effect on the output signal is partially related to the turndown ratio of the transmitter As the turndown ratio increases the peak to peak noise on the output signal increases You can use
45. 0 10 8 16 28 20 6325 28 3 37 0 42 4 Operating Voltage Vdc 21012 Loop wiring is connected to the transmitter by simply attaching the positive and negative loop wires to the positive and negative SIGNAL screw terminals on the terminal block in the transmitter s electronics housing shown in Figure 17 Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the transmitter to earth ground A ground terminal can be optionally added to the outside of the electronics housing While it is not necessary to ground the transmitter for proper operation we suggest that you do so to minimize the possible effects of noise on the output signal and provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge damage Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body certification Refer to section 3 2 CE Conformity Europe Notice for special conditions Optional lightning protection option LP can be ordered for transmitters that will be installed in areas highly susceptible to lightning strikes Figure 17 shows the 5 screw terminal block used when the lightning protection option is ordered Continued on next page ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 43 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Summary continued Barriers can be installed per manufacturer s instructions for transmitters to be used in intrinsically safe applications Figure
46. 0 383134 SLOWSe 000 VhWeal c UNISIA A SLYNASL IV ALON LNAWdINGS ZL 3 9 SALON ABLYSANOO aaTaavE gt WatNoo SNLVAVddV G31VIQUSSV G3AUsddV ALILINd JAWS 310 Wa 00E0WS Adds WG 00 VWel Alda 006 001 531435 YALLINSNVAL 000615 Ht ONISIA 31VN231 IV lt ALON 4 3 9 SALON INAWdINOA QI3183AND2 3INNVE I LNDO Snivavddv 131912058 ALILIN3 DAWA ce SALON eee 2 et Adds WO O0EVWs 3AD1d c 31UN5 99 j3 08 dnas 006 001 531035 I NOISIAIG H 8 T 55970 000815 3131557 19 S nuq lvzZvH NUILVOUT SNOcsvZVH NON ONIAVAC 31V9S LON OT l DAG I evevOc t 31LJIV2 6 40 T LHS NU 3SN 3NON31V9S NIISN3WIG Bv3n9Nv a3rdans SI LI HOIHA 304 1 NVHL Z60860 QV3v E E VOZIS ey 3H4D 3SUdBnd ANY ADA dasn NIWSWHO 081 XVW A 22 AA Sin
47. 1502 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 003 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 004 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 005 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 006 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 019 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 020 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 007 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 008 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain Continued on next page 228 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 51204983 013 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 014 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 023 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 024 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 015 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 300 wl st stl bolts 512049
48. 3911 ty PT 30911 19 002 2 0 2 _ 10 Adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to URV 100 11 F HT T T Present URV setting If displayed T 21 H 2 o s 9 F value does not match applied pressure key in matching URV value or adjust pressure accordingly before you press CORRECT key in next step 12 RESET HT T T etry Bn Prompt asks if URV is to be RE C T calibrated to applied reference RECT pressure If it is to be calibrated go to next Step If it isn t press CLR key and try again 13 NON VOL HT T T TIPTTT 0 Calibrates URV to reference input ENTER Iwlo RIK tINIe pressure for span 10096 Yes calibration RV PE E PTI erty E CTIE D 1 p PIT 3911 229290 2 _ 39 14 Vv T T elt 1 Initiate shift key selection SALET pF ppp EDS z o lt gt Yes 1 Pjr Is F c Njej L EIGENEN olt aiT tjt N Saves data in transmitter s nonvolatile memory This takes approximately 8 seconds A pp j READY Continued on next page 190 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 10 4 Calibrating Range with SFC continued Proce
49. 74 Liquid Level Measurement DP with Remote Seals Starting Up 148 Liquid Level Measurement DP Starting Up Pressurized Tank 137 Starting Up Vented Tank 34 Local Smart Meter Set Up Summary Using Meter Pushbuttons 2 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 265 Local Smart Meter Keystroke Summary Using SFC 103 Meter Transmitter Interaction 168 Options 13 Output Conformity 105 Pushbuttons 04 Reference Specifications 24 Set Up Using Meter Psuhbuttons 104 Set Up Using SFC 97 Setting display of LRV using meter pushbuttons 110 Local Smart Meter Display Description 164 Error Codes 167 Typical Indications 165 Local Zero and Span Adjusting Procedure 85 Loop wiring 48 LRV Lower Range Value 64 LRV and URV Keying in Values 87 Keystroke Summary Applied Pressures 84 Keystroke Summary Keying in Values 82 Setting to Applied Pressures 83 M Maintenance Routine 170 Memories Non volatile 62 SFC and ST 3000 62 Message Format DE Only Selecting V 95 DE Mode Only 65 Keystroke Summary 96 Meter Body Replacing 78 Meter Engineering Units 66 Mode and Software Checking 55 Mode of Operation Changing 58 Keystroke Summary 59 Model Number Format 4 Mounting Area Considerations 19 Mounting Location Suggested 39 Mounting Precautions Model STD110 32 Models STA122 and STA922 30 N Non volatile Memory Copying data into non volatile memory 63 ST 3000 62
50. CALIBRATION U 183 10 1 Introduction Diuspa eed ie eid ad Rae eed Alans 183 jV AMea ET 184 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal sse nennen eene nenne 185 10 4 Calibrating Range with SEQ R ahua esent 189 10 5 Resetting Callbration reete ae ete et etin 192 SECTION 11 195 TUN sm k m u EN n DP Bn 195 11 2 OVeryleWu dg eer o e nee det a ee eG ee sukai 196 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC Display sese 197 11 4 Diagnostic MESSAGES uuu b m u p a Cr E dide quia MAS 199 11 5 Rurining Status Check ctetu h SS s aa Q au ret noctu heit uas 202 116 Interpreting NIeSS8ag6S uuu taedet eere 203 11 7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard n nn 207 SECTON 12 PARTS LIST u n detras Ei 209 12 1 Replacement Parts ree eid e ee e redeem eoe re Ed ee ced ae eed 209 SECTION 13 REFERENCE 231 13 1 Wiring Diagrams eine o y an n PU e etn ee y ed 231 APPENDIX A TABLE III OPTIONS IN MODEL NUMBER 233 Table lll Obtions Referente uu u au ha etl eae iss antes ua aaa i g sh 233 APPENDIX B FREEZE PROTECTION OF TRANSMITTERS
51. INNV S309IA3G 007 40 192 210922492 WS OOEWWA NT 00E Val 34 008 YWA WSOAINI 3 vuc22 51 3I Av iev gt A0 SNUILdU SSLaW SLOWS 000 VWsl 2 3LON _ ALILING D 9 j4 3 02 8wv SdnD2D I NOISIAIC HI II I 1990 1 SNUGAVZVH NUN NLIILVOLI 3141557 100 SNUGAVZ9H a 00790701 Taaa T 00 40 40 2 0 12024 LAJA 66 T 0T S 22664 GA 26 62 6 0 r2 63 35737135 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 6 8 Z 9 S v 2 Ivev0elS TT o 6 8 IA z S Te I DSNIAVBGO 31939S LON Of SATZ Iv2v02 3 113129 630 2 IHS 00 90 0131ea q A33 3195 Iperozig Ey Pasun J Ivev0elS w qvod WS O0EVWA WS O0EVWA TSCOW S3L3W LAVWS NOILdO 8313W SLOWSa OOOEVWA c IV YALLIWSNVAL OOOSLS t ONIAIM SLYNASL IV WS O0EVWA 2 ALON D j 3 0 5 8 vV dnUsb T NDISIAIG HH TI T YSLLINSNVYL 00015 NOILVOO Q3IJISSV 19 44 3 9 SALON GI3183AND3 33I82V8 SNLVaVdd G31VIOUSSV G3AU8ddV ALLLIN3 CL 9 SALOND QI3183ANU2 2I3INa V8 Snivavddv G31VIOUSSV G3AUsddVv ALILIN3 234 3 ALON 1N3WdIn83 IU3 LNDO
52. Manual PM12 410 which is part of the TDC 3000X system bookset Your primary troubleshooting tool is using the SFC to run a status check recording displayed diagnostic messages and then interpreting the diagnostic messages See Table 66 to run a status check using an SFC You should also use the SFC to verify the transmitter s configuration data and check to be sure your process is operating correctly 196 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC Display About the symbol When transmitter diagnostics detect a non critical status condition the number symbol appears as the last character in the top row of the SFC display along with whatever you are displaying at the time Thus the purpose of the symbol is simply to let you know that a non critical status condition exists Procedure To clear the symbol from the SFC display you must first determine what non critical status condition exists and then correct it The general procedure would be e Press srAT key on SFC and record diagnostic messages that appear in bottom row of display e Use Table 60 as an aid in determining the possible cause of the diagnostic message and the suggested corrective action to take to clear the symbol e The symbol will disappear from the display when the diagnostic condition is corrected Table 60 Clearing the Symbol from the
53. Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled continuous electric heating to prevent water freezing at 0 F 18 C and 20 mph wind velocity while not exceeding 225 F 107 C at the transmitter body at 90 F 32 C ambient and zero wind velocity The operating costs in energy for these systems usually exceed the high initial cost of the thermostat systems Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100 F 38 C without thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will normally exceed the body temperature rating under opposite extremes Continued on next page 242 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Electric heating continued Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal transmitter body bolts and containing electrical heating elements and thermostats certain precautions are required with such arrangements Some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available thermostats Also thermostat settings should not approach the body temperature limit because the heat gradient across the meter body can be such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when the thermostat setting 15 lower Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for Class I Group D Division I and II installations The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered For
54. can operate the SFC The procedure in Table 7 outlines the steps for the battery pack Table 7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack Step Action 1 Turn SFC face down on working surface Use metric hex wrench 2 5 mm to remove screws in battery compartment cover and remove cover Insert battery pack in compartment and connect plug in compartment to pin on battery back Example Battery pack installation Battery Pack Hex Screws Replace cover and tighten hex screws Connect lead from battery charger to recessed connector on left side of SFC le The SFC battery charger is not intrinsically safe Always recharge the SFC battery pack in a nonhazardous location The SFC itself is an intrinsically safe device Continued on next page 22 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 3 4 Considerations for SFC continued Install SFC battery pack continued Temperature Limits Usage guidelines Table7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack continued Step Action 5 Plug battery charger into any standard 120 Vac outlet or universal European 240 Vac outlet as applicable for charger power rating If 240 Vac charger is supplied with stripped leads instead of universal European plug lead identification for 240 Vac charger is as follows Lead Color Function Blue Neutral Brown Hot Green Yellow Ground ATTENTION
55. essere eene etre rre 223 Figure 63 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body 224 Figure 64 High Temperature Meter Body sese ennt trennen ener ener ene 226 Figure 65 SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories 228 Figure B 1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid 238 Figure B 2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid 239 Figure B 3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow 240 Figure B 4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals 241 Figure B 5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal 242 Figure B 6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control eese 243 Figure B 7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control sees 244 Figure B 8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating 247 Figure B 9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating 248 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual ix
56. installing and wiring the ST 3000 transmitter for operation e ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and SFC Smart Field Communicator Model STS 103 User s Manual 34 ST 25 14 One or more copies are sent to the address designated on the order when specified This document provides detailed information for installing wiring configuring starting up operating maintaining and servicing the ST 3000 transmitter This is the main reference manual for the ST 3000 transmitter and it overlaps some data in the previously listed Installation Guide 34 ST 33 39 and in the following Operating Guide 34 ST 11 14 to minimize cross reference e ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 34 ST 09 06 Shipped with User s Manual This document provides abbreviated versions of procedures for installing wiring configuring calibrating and troubleshooting the ST 3000 transmitter for quick reference e Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Pocket Card 34 ST 11 15 One card is shipped with every SFC This card provides quick reference of keystroke actions for selected transmitter interface tasks e Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Operating Guide 34 ST 11 14 One copy is shipped with every SFC This document provides detailed SFC information and keystroke actions for interfacing with these Honeywell Smartline Transmitters ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Non Release 300 models STT 3000 Smart Temperature Transmitter MagneW 3000 Smart Electr
57. it takes up to 16 hours to fully recharge the battery pack and you can use the SFC continuously for up to 24 hours before the battery pack needs recharging The ambient operating temperature limits for the SFC are 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F with relative humidity in the range of 10 to 90 RH For transmitters operating in the Analog Mode be sure to put an analog control loop into its manual mode before initiating SFC communications with the transmitter Also be sure any switches that may trip alarms or interlocks associated with the analog loop are secured or turned OFF Communication superimposes digital signals on the loop wiring that could affect the analog control signal Be sure the power supply voltage does not exceed 45Vdc The ST 3000 transmitter and SFC were designed to operate with voltages below 45Vdc Be sure there is at least 250 ohms of resistance between the SFC and the power supply for proper communications 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 23 3 5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option Reference Table 8 lists pertinent Smart Meter specifications for reference specifications Table 8 Local Smart Meter Specifications Operating Conditions Parameter Rated Extreme Transportation and Storage Ambient Temperature F 40 to 176 58 to 194 C 40 to 80 50 to 90 Relative Humidity RH 10 to 90 0 to 100 Accuracy No error
58. make configuration change LR EYETV PIR OFT ECE then move back W R jumper on PWA HT LT Pl Tsoala Value calculation is greater than Press CLR key and start again Be RANGE 2 10 3 9F display range sure special units conversion factor is not greater than display range 206 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 11 7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard Procedure The procedure in Table 68 shows how to run an SFC display and keyboard test Table 68 Running SFC Display and Keyboard Test Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Turn on SFC 2 A Pult TM ATNT Initiate shift key selection 2 W Dp rjs PjL A Y TEST All display segments are working bs LY jO KAY KEYBOARD TEST Ready to check operation of rew fet individual keys 3 E E IK 5 Confirm key operation by verifying 0 r ow 2 1 1 that its row and column location on keyboard are displayed 4 Repeat Step 3 as required to check all keys or go to Step 5 to exit test 5 NON VOL IK EY B OARD T EIS T Check ENTER key location 1 11 gt T N MAIN Ready for operation ll ili 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 207 208 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section
59. on the high pressure HP side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact with the process fluid The low pressure LP side of the transmitter is vented to atmosphere no connection It is the End User s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter s service condition To prevent degradation of performance in Flush Mounted Flanged Transmitters exercise care to ensure that the internal diameter of the flange gasket does not obstruct the sensing diaphragm To prevent degradation of performance in Extended Mount Flanged Transmitters ensure that there is sufficient clearance in front of the sensing diaphragm body Figure 10 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation Attention Dotted area indicates use de Um with closed tank with reference leg ind E B Maximum Level Variable Head H1 Minimum Level II HP Side mounted LP Side vented to tank to atmosphere Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 33 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Flush mounting ATTENTION To mount a flush mounted model cut a hole for a 1 standard pipe in the tank or pipe where the transmitter is to be mounted Weld the 1 mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and secure with the locking bolt Tig
60. q 2 8 v dnoad SSY 3DnO3SNISINI 31IS302038 34VS ATIVOISNIALNI 00015 NDILVOU 931351557 195 CL 9 SALON GI3133AND2 N3Teel VE Snivavddv G31VIOUSSV 31311839 59 lt 9 SALON lt AILAJANDI AIINAYD SNLYXYddY 0219190559 3I3I19339 VSO Z60860 V3V 1 LNAWdINOA 7051309 lt ALON A lddn s 33 Ud ALON LNAWdINOS 71051309 ALON aaMOd NOILVOO 1 SNAUCYVZVH NON v TT OT 6 8 S 3 T ONIAVAC 37995 LON DG Y SAT 2evcv0gc 31L31V2 640 LHS 00 90 01 31V1 3 A 38 37995 Xv Sex Gy 004040 1v2V cvcv0cIS AW OOEVWA TSCOW A3L3W 9U IVNV NIILdU amp 3134 3LiUW3e 000 WS gt DNISIA SLYNAAL 19 033 L2 r s ALON H 133091193 0 00 E SNLVAVddV 2319190587 3Id4I1339 WSO Adds AW O0E VWs m M3
61. the transmitter also provides continued its meter body temperature as a secondary variable which is only available as a read only parameter through the SFC when the transmitter is in its analog mode See Figure 2 Figure 2 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation Factory Characterization Data Electronics Housing Meter Body G 7 725 LU DP or PP I Sensor L Temperature 2 p gt Proportional 4 to ensor 20 mA PV output Static Pressure Digital signal N Sensor imposed during SFC N N communications L Modular Electronics Terminal Block Pressure When the transmitter is in its DE mode the process variable is available for monitoring and control purposes and the meter body temperature is also available as a secondary variable for monitoring purposes only See Figure 3 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 3 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued Figure 3 Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation Factory Characterization Data Electronics Housing Meter Body Sensor Temperature Sensor r p gt Digital signal broadcasts PV in floating point format over Multiplexer Static Pressure Sensor
62. xii ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Technical Assistance If you encounter a problem with your ST 3000 Smart Transmitter check to see how your transmitter is currently configured to verify that all selections are consistent with your application If the problem persists you can reach Honeywell s Solution Support Center for technical support by telephone during normal business hours An engineer will discuss your problem with you Please have your complete model number serial number and software revision number on hand for reference You can find the model and serial numbers on the transmitter nameplates You can also view the software version number using the SFC or SCT 3000 software application By Telephone Honeywell Solution Support Center Phone 1 800 423 9883 U S only Outside the U S call 1 602 313 6510 Additional Help You may also seek additional help by contacting the Honeywell distributor who supplied your ST 3000 transmitter By E mail You can also e mail your technical questions or comments about this product to Honeywell Solution Support Center e mail ace honeywell com Problem Resolution fitis determined that a hardware problem exists a replacement transmitter or part will be shipped with instructions for returning the defective unit Please do not return your transmitter without authorization from Honeywell s Solution Support Center or until the replacement has b
63. 1 2 protection 51404078 502 Series 100 900 terminal assembly with lightning protection Process head gasket kit 1 1 4 4 10 For STD924 A B E F and J STD930 A B E F and 58 60 K3 J STG944 STG974 models 30757505 001 Teflon and Viton For all other Series 100 DP and STD924 C D G H K 57 K6 and L STD930 C D G H K and L and STD974 models 30753788 003 Teflon 30753788 004 Viton For STA122 STA140 STA922 STA940 STG140 and 59 K3 STG170 30754154 002 Teflon and Viton 30754154 003 For STG180 59 K3 Meter Body 1 1 2 2 4 Specify complete Series 100 900 DP Models 57 1 model number from Series 900 DP Models 57 58 1 nameplate plus R300 Series 100 900 GP AP Models 59 1 Series 900 GP Dual Head Model 60 1 Series 100 900 Inline and Series 900 AP Models 61 1 Series 900 Flush Mount Models 62 1 Series 100 900 Flange Mount Models 63 1 Series 100 High Temperature Models 64 1 232 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section 13 Reference Drawings 13 1 Wiring Diagrams External Wiring Wiring diagram drawing numbers are listed here for ST 3000 Release Diagrams 300 Series 100 and 900 Transmitters These wiring diagrams are included in numerical order behind this page for wiring reference ST 3000 Description Drawing Number Release 300 For non intrinsically safe application 30753607 Series 100 900 For intrinsically safe application FM 51204241 Transmitters For intrinsically
64. 12 Parts List 12 1 Replacement Parts Part identification e Allindividually salable parts are indicated in each figure by key number callout For example 1 2 3 and so on e Allparts that are supplied in kits are indicated in each Figure by key number callout with the letter K prefix For example K2 and so on e Parts denoted with a T are recommended spares See Table 81 for summary list of recommended spare parts Figure 53 shows major parts for given model with parts list Figure references Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 209 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference ST 3000 Release 300 Electronic Housing Assembly See Figures 55 and 56 Meter Bodies gi O o NR 28946 LGP LAP See Models Figure DP See Single Head See Dual Head See STG14L 61 Models Figure GP Models Figure GP Models Figure STG17L 61 STD110 57
65. 12 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in 1 digit and activate sign segment Readout now displays sign segment which will be BLANK for positive values unless lower value was set for negative values before Press to set 1 digit as BLANK Press to set 1 digit as 1 13 Press Increase button to set sign segment Sign segment setting to minus sign for negative values or Decrease button to set it to BLANK for positive values 14 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in current settings as lower display value limit ATTENTION For CUSTOM unit in transmitter with LINEAR output you must set both lower and upper display limits for values to take effect If you let either the lower or upper display limit time out after 30 seconds Press to set sign segment as segment as minus the meter discards both newly set values and BLANK for sig C for negative reverts back to the previously set values positive values values Press to set sign e Ifyou have not yet set the upper display limit value the meter automatically enters the upper display setting function after it displays previously set value if applicable Go to Table 36 e f you have already set the upper display limit value this completes the lower and upper display limits setting function for Custom engineering units in the transmitter Meter returns to normal operation Continued on next page 114 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 U
66. 4 Selecting Output E Ormai pe eR RR E M eR Per ae Hr d ne eund 74 6 5 Adjusting Damping eit edocet c es peut 77 6 6 Selecting Unit of Measurement U nennen ennemis 79 6 7 Setting Range Values Using SEG niit boe ibt eret 81 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments n 85 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only n na 92 6 10 Selecting Message Format DE Mode Only senem nnns 95 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC uu u u u u uhan i emen nennen nnnm 97 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons n 104 6 13 DISCONMECUNG SFO uu PR 122 SECTION Z STARTUP X uuu uu aa a a Ar Eaa aa aaae EAEE EARTE 123 MMOGUCUOM e a 123 2 Startup Tasks EN mete e e e e ted ted tied tu 124 1 3 Running Analog Output adu o RR ET e Re Rhe EE 125 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter I mener nnn 128 7 5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter eene 131 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank nnne 133 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank n 136 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP
67. Analog and DE Modes 56 Analog meter connections 48 Analog Mode 2 B Barrier Diaphragms Cleaning and Inspecting 171 Battery Pack Installing and Charging 22 Bracket Mounting Transmitter 27 C Calibration Calibrating Analog Output Signal 185 Calibrating Range with SFC 189 Equipment Required 784 Resetting 192 Typical Equipment Connections 791 Communications Starting 52 Configuration Database 61 Configuration Decisions Summary 67 Configuration Parameters 64 D Damping 64 Damping Time Adjusting 77 Keystroke Summary 78 DE Mode 3 DE protocol format 2 Diagnostic Messages 196 Communication Errors 200 Critical Failures 200 Interpreting 203 Interrupt Messages 201 Invalid Key Entry 201 Non Critical Failures 799 Diaphragm Seals 240 Display and Keyboard Test Running 207 Index Dropout Square Root 76 Electric Heating 242 EMC Directive 18 Enclosure ratings 264 Engineering Units Selecting 79 Engineering Units High and Low 66 Environmental Conditions 79 F Failsafe Direction Changing 156 Flange Adapter Installing 42 Flange Connections Description 41 Flange mounted transmitter 35 Mounting 35 Flow Measurement DP Starting Up 129 Flush Mounted Transmitter Mounting 34 Freeze Protection 237 H Hazardous locations reference IEC Classifications 259 North American Classifications 253 Hold Memory SFC 62 Lightning Protection 46 Linear Output Selecting
68. C Degrees F 450 842 300 Certification and Conformity Details Table D 3 CENELEC LCIE Certification Flameproof Supply lt 45 Vdc IP 66 67EEx d IIC T6 3A Intrinsically Safe EEx ia IIC T5 40 lt Ta lt 93 Flameproof Supply lt 45 Vdc IP 66 67 EEx d IIC T6 LCIE Intrinsic Safety Parameters 0 With no integral indicator or with integral Smart Meter option SM With Analog Meter option ME 1 Installin accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204243 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 261 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations continued Certification and Conformity Details continued Table D 4 Standards Australia LOSC Certification Intrinsically Safe IIC 4 Class Zone 0 Flameproof IIC 6 Class Zone 1 Non Sparking Apparatus of Protection n n IIC 6 Class Zone 2 LOSC Intrinsic Safety Parameters Ui 424V li 225mA Pi 1 2 W Ci 4 2nF Li 0 With no integral indicator or with integral Smart Meter option SM Li 150 uH With Analog Meter option ME 1 Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204309 Table D 5 Zone 2 Europe Declaration of Conformity Electrical Apparatus With Type of Protection n per IEC 79 15 IP 66 67 Ex Il 3 GD X Council Directive 94 9 EC 4
69. Corrective Action is silus M B OR sira rus P T Bio Pressure input is two times greater than URL of transmitter e Check range and if required replace transmitter with one that has a wider range Meter body may have been damaged Check the transmitter for accuracy and linearity Replace meter body and recalibrate if needed s r A r u s Plr Talola t fe N o pfa c Iclolm P No temperature compensation data exists for D A converter Effect will be minor degradation of ambient temperature influence specifications Replace electronics module S r r vis P T 5 E N s o R R T EIMP Meter body temperature is too high Accuracy and life span may decrease if it remains high Take steps to insulate meter body from temperature source Is r A riu s Pr T T TT TTT Selection is unknown Be sure SFC software is latest version Press SHIFT and 3 to view SFC software version 198 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 11 4 Diagnostic Messages Summary The diagnostic messages can be grouped into one of these five categories e Non Critical Failures Transmitter continues to calculate PV output Critical Failures Transmitter drives PV output to failsafe state e Communications Errors In
70. Description eere enne enne nennen nre n rennen nnns 104 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code nennen 106 Selecting Engineering ai eR dte ey eei dw Gd ec OA 107 Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display Values 110 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display a 111 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display a 115 Startup Procedure Reference eee eec eS 124 Using Transmitter in Constant Current Source Mode sse 125 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC sse 128 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC esee 131 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank 134 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank 137 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC 141 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC a 145 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC 148 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access sse eene 152 Cutting Failsafe Direction Jumper necer neret ennt enne nnne 156 Wri
71. Groups B C amp D Dust Ignition Proof for Class II Division 1 Groups E F amp G Class Ill Division 1 Conduit seals not required 42 Vdc max Intrinsically Safe for Class Groups A B C amp D Class Il Groups E F amp G Class 111 Divisions 1 T4 at 40 C T3A at 93 maximum ambient Install per Honeywell drawing 51204242 Suitable for Class Il amp 111 Division 2 Groups A B C D E F amp G hazardous locations T4 at 93 C 42 Vdc max Environmental Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations Encl 4X CSA Certified Barriers Class I IL Division 1 and 2 Groups 28V 200 Q A G 20V 150 Q C G 1 Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204242 258 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations About IEC The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus identified These recommendations are found within IEC 79 0 through 79 15 and 79 28 For all EC countries as well as vartous neighboring countries CENELEC member states the European Standards EN 50 014 to EN 50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus They were established on the basis of the IEC However these recommendations are much more detailed by comparison
72. Liquid Level Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 8 If SFC and milliammeter readings Then are zero 4mA go to Step 11 not zero go to Step 9 4mA and Tee connector is level with transmitter are not zero 4mA and Tee connector is above transmitter go to Step 10 SHIFT INPUT OUT PUT RECT Q m T AA NON VOL ENTER Yes Sur 1 PT 39114 N Pur 1 PIT 391141 PE T T TI PUT 1 PT 329211 BEER N PUT 1 PT 3911 AER o L INP N 1 39111 SNe TITI 1 srona pepe ur pepe UN PYT 1 PT 3911 Initiate shift key selection Read applied input pressure Prompt asks if the applied input pressure equals zero input If it is zero input go to next keystroke If it is not press CLR key to exit function and try again Zero input is set equal to applied input pressure Go to Step 11 BELLE BERGER d EAE Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 143 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description
73. Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Selecting Engineering Units continued Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units Loosen lock on meter end cap and unscrew Typical display for meter in transmitter that cap from housing Be sure transmitter power has no previous meter configuration stored in is ON its memory Honeywell v v Appears when transmitter is in its Analog mode Press UNITS SET button Display shows code for current engineering units setting Honeywell v v v Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 107 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons Continued Selecting Engineering Units continued Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units continued Press Increase key to call up next code or Decrease button call up previous code Repeat this action until desired code is on display You can hold down the Increase or Decrease key to scroll forward or backward through the codes ATTENTION Remember that if transmitter is configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity the only valid code selections are EUO 96 EUD GPM EUE GPH EUF Custom If transmitter is configured for LINEAR output conformity EUO 96 to EUC and EUF CUSTOM are valid code selections Press UNITS SET button to lock in selected code ATTENTION you select an invalid code according
74. Message Format DE Mode Only 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons 6 13 Disconnecting SFC About this section This section introduces you to ST 3000 transmitter configuration It identifies the parameters that make up the transmitter s configuration database and provides procedures for entering values selections for the given configuration parameters If you will be using the SCT 3000 software Release 3 12 2 or greater instead of an SFC to configure the transmitter follow the SCT 3000 on line help and on line documentation to configure the transmitter s database 60 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 2 Overview About configuration Each ST 3000 Transmitter includes a configuration database which defines its particular operating characteristics You can use an SFC to change selected parameters within a given transmitter s database to alter its operating characteristics We call this process of viewing and or changing database parameters configuration Figure 23 shows a graphic summation of the configuration process Figure 23 Summary of Configuration Process Configuration Database Transmitter s Operating Characteristics View and or change database parameters Jt ay est ST 3000 ATTENTION If the transmitter is operating in the DE mode you can
75. Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal Background You can calibrate the transmitter s analog output circuit at its 0 and 100 levels by using the transmitter in its constant current source mode It is not necessary to remove the transmitter from service Procedure The procedure in Table 57 shows the steps for calibrating the output signal for a transmitter in the analog mode Note that the procedure is similar for a transmitter in the DE mode but the SFC must be used to read the output in percent in place of the milliammeter or voltmeter readings Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample test turn it on Connect a precision equipment hookup milliammeter or voltmeter 0 0296 accuracy or better in loop to check ATTENTION sure the accuracy of the resistor is 0 01 better for current measurements made by voltage drop 2 DE READ tlale T T T 11 Be sure any switches that may trip TIR I PS s E c u R E DI alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 NON VOL Tale INo ETL Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER s Fc won k IN G and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 LIN DP Tae 1 pp 4 INPUT T
76. N I c s lC olu T P 1 P T 301111 Transmitter s programmable read only memory PROM E LJE C TIRIO N I C S lt D gt fault sir a riuls P T 3 0 1 1 Electronics PWA and meter body are incompatible rlAjulL r 1 5 0 8 N P U T Possible meter body or electronics based problem Communication errors Table Table 63 summarizes the message displays associated with communication errors communication error has these effects on SFC operation e Allthe SFC functions are disabled e Communication error messages are cycled in the display at two second intervals Press ip and then ENTER to view messages again 63 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors Message Description Lae ARI O U N D E RIR Communications is unsuccessful SFC failed a communication diagnostic test t o vjojtiT Loop resistance is too large or supply voltage is too low A N A Lae Fla H N G G V LIT Pepe iEjela L IR E sIPIo N SEE Illegal response from transmitter Continued on next page 200 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 11 4 Diagnostic Messages continued Communication errors continued Table 63 Summary of D
77. NOISIAIG III 9 II I 85970 NOILVS0O 03135155 10 SNUCAVZVH NUILLVOL SQLlGeVvZVvH NLUN P TT Ot 6 2 9 S m z T SNIAVNI 37925 LON Od 7 DATS TF8F02 i JIVI EMEL ZN Wwevoets WI O00EVHWa T3UW XILIW TVlIDIQ NUILdDU 3 3134 JLOW3J 000EVWA UNISIA 3l1VN231 IV Jj I 3 9 SALON LN3WdINOI QIS183ANTD 33I33NV8S gt 1041309 SniVelVddv po ALILIN3 32 43 E C A ddns W 00 Vel 33 Ud Trevdets 006 000 531035 YALLINSNVYL 000615 TH DNISIA J3LYNJJL IV JLON 9 5310 LNSWdINODS QI3183AND2 33DRIVE 100109 SniVelvddv 1319190557 C3JAUSddV ALILINS 32383 W 00 V Wel 2 ILON 9 3 FITTV dnnss 006 001 S3IN3S T NUISIAIQ HI I SS 19 1 1 000815 NUDILVO9UT T3LJISSV 19 SPD VZVvH ENIAVMI 37795 LON OF 7 SACT9 TF8P08 3 11409 CLECE ELEL wewoec 4 memwemony ONIAIA JLYNJAL IV E ALON LN3WdINOA CZ 9 SALON Q13183AND2 3IRIVID ID NDS SNLVAVdd CILVIOUSS q3A0edd ALON ALILIN3 Jaws 9915 WS 00E YWA 2 9 jJ 3 T 9 g V drD3D 006 00T S3IM3S T NUISIAIG HI 9 I T SS 19 4JILINSNVHIL 000815 31451559 19 SDUGSVZVvH NOILVOOT SflLICel V ZVH NLIN ONIAVAd 3779S LON Of Vv DATZ iv2vO02 311H40V3 vr v ur u V MN
78. Please refer to Table 31 in this manual for a description of the pushbuttons on the meter face See Section 8 6 for a description of the indicators with examples of typical display indications and error codes Note that the display may revert to dashes after the self test until the transmitter initializes all its functions Use the SFC to check the transmitter s status 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 57 5 4 Changing Mode of Operation Procedure If you need to change your transmitter s mode of operation use the steps in Table 19 to change the mode from analog to digital or digital to analog If you have an optional Local Smart Meter you can readily tell your transmitter s present mode of operation by checking whether the ANALOG indicator on the meter display is lit or not Table 19 Changing Mode of Operation Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 A s T Initiates shift key selection Note that sIHI F r transmitter tag number ST 3000 in top row is used for example A lt gt purposes only Q Asks if you want to change to DE ciu N D E DT TT digital mode If you want to change mode go to Step 2 If you do not want to change mode press cLR OR key to exit function A oie sit joo Asks if you want to change to Lc HIN G oe analog mode If yo
79. Pressure Flange Mount STF14T 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 150 T 40 to 302 T Remote Diaphragm Seals STR12D STR13D STR14G STR17G STR14A See Specification Sheet See Specification Sheet STR93D STR94G 40 to 85 40 to 185 See Specification Sheet T Process temperatures above 125 C 257 F require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as follows Process Temperature Ambient Temperature Limit 150 C 302 F 50 C 122 F 140 C 284 F 60 C 140 F 125 C 257 F 85 C 185 F tt Process temperatures above 65 C 149 F require a 1 1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature NOTE For transmitters with local meter option see Table 8 NOTE Transmitters with other fill fluids CTFE Neobee Etc have different Operating Temperature Limits For more specific information refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter nameplate 20 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter continued Pressure ratings Table 6 lists maximum working pressure for a given transmitter Upper Range Limit URL The maximum allowable working pressure MAWP is the pressure used for the approval body safety calculations Table 6 Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Ratings Transmitter Type Upper Range Limit URL MAWP Draft Range 10 inches H20 25 mbar 50 psi 3 5 bar Different
80. Range Values Using SFC Continued Procedure 1 continued Table 25 Keying in LRV and continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 I T T elt lo Key in 45 as desired URV setting At PE TT PtH 91 3 5 1 p Jer story ay 415 o 6 NON VOL HL T ye Message exchange is working ENTER Is PIT New URV setting stored in 45 2 _ transmitter s working memory Keystroke 1 summary Figure 30 shows keystroke summary for keying in LRV and UR V for quick reference Figure 30 Keystroke Summary for Keying in LRV and URV NON VOL ENTER Yes 22510 Continued on next page 82 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 7 Setting Range Values Using SFC Continued Procedure 2 Table 26 gives the procedure for setting range values to sample applied pressures Table 26 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Apply known input pressure to transmitter that represents LRV for 0 4 mAdc output 2 E F IRT HT T PR Present LRV setting Pressure for 4 74 is jajajaja u 2 o s e r mAdc 0 output 3 G LIR RT T P sey Prompt asks if you want to set LRV SET l j Is ET
81. Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution Display Resolution Bargraph 3 of reading Shown as Digital Readout 0 005 for 19 99 reading range 19 99 0 05 for 199 9 reading range 199 9 0 5 for 1999 reading range 1999 5 for 19990 reading range 19 99 K 50 for 199900 reading range 199 9 K 500 for 41999000 reading range 1999 K 5000 for 19990000 reading range 19990 K Display Update Rate Above 32 F 0 C second or below 32 F 0 C 1 seconds Meter Display at High The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are and Low Temperature true in that no damage to the meter will occur over these temperatures Extremes however the readability of the LCD is affected 1f taken to these temperature extremes e The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 C 176 and 194 F rendering the display unreadable This effect is only temporary and normally occurs at 90 C 194 F e Atlow temperatures the update rate of the display is lengthened to 1 5 seconds due to the slower response time of the display At 20 C 4 F the display becomes unreadable due to slow response of the LCD This is also only temporary and normal readability will return when temperature returns above 20 C 4 F 24 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section 4 Installation 4 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these
82. SFC Display If Message is Then Possible Cause is And Suggested Corrective Action is sira rus Clo RiRIE cITIsI JR E SIE T All calibration CORRECTS were deleted and data was reset to default characterization values Recalibrate transmitter sir ajrujs felt 5 5 s P A N SPAN correction factor is outside acceptable limits Could be that transmitter was in output mode Check input pressure and be sure it matches calibrated range value Check meter body Do a URV CORRECT procedure 5 5 5 5 z E R O 3 0 1 1 clo RIR ZERO correction factor is outside acceptable limits Could be that either INPUT was zero or transmitter was in output mode during a CORRECT procedure Check input pressure and be sure it matches calibrated range value Check meter body Do a LRV CORRECT procedure sT A Tus Pr Transmitter is operating as current source Press ouTPUT and cLR keys to tell transmitter to exit output mode Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 197 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC Display continued Procedure continued Table 60 Clearing the Symbol from the SFC Display continued If Message is Then Possible Cause is And Suggested
83. SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 2 Overview Continued Copying data into non volatile memory ATTENTION When setting up or configuring a ST 3000 whether you are changing one element or a full database all configuration data must be copied into the transmitter s non volatile memory Normally thirty seconds after a value is changed the transmitter automatically copies it into the non volatile memory But if you change an element and power goes down before the change is copied to non volatile memory you will lose the data in the working memory Therefore whenever you make any changes in the transmitter using the SFC always end your procedure by pressing SHIFT and ENTER This action immediately copies the changes from working memory to non volatile memory Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 63 6 2 Overview Continued What to configure Table 20 summarizes the parameters that are included in the configuration database for an ST 3000 pressure transmitter in either the analog or DE mode of operation Be aware that configuration data for the transmitter as well as for the Local Smart Meter is stored in a non volatile memory on the transmitter s PWA and make up the transmitter s configuration database Therefore the transmitter and meter configuration are lost if the PWA is replaced Performing a save and restore function using the SFC will preser
84. STA922 30 Transmitter options Options 233 Transmitter Types 5 Tthree Valve Manifold Piping 38 Turndown Ratio 77 U Unit of Measurement 64 URV Upper Range Value 64 V Vibration Sources 9 Wiring Connections 45 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections 56 Z Zero and Span Adjust Options 3 Zero corrects 32 Zero shift 30 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 267 Honeywell Addendum to ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300 and Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 User Manual 34 ST 25 14 Overview Two new models have been added to the family of ST3000 Smart Transmitters Gauge Pressure Model STGI9L Gauge Pressure Model STG99L Each of these has an Upper Range Limit URL of 10000 psi 690 bar which is significantly higher than previously available models Also each of these new models has significantly higher ratings for Maximum Working Pressure 10000 psi or 690 bar and Overpressure 15000 psi or 1034 bar The burst pressure is rated at 26000 psi 1793 bar Except for the higher operating range each of these two new models includes physical and functional features similar to those of closely related family members STGIxL and STG9xL With the exceptions noted in this addendum all parts of User Manual 34 ST 25 14 apply to these new models Because of the similarities between new and existing models these new devices can be used as direct replacem
85. Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family L a aa alas saam AAB a nnne eene nnne 6 SEG ModelDitferences q xi l o tette itt unter M dee 9 Local Smart Meter Available Options essere enne enne nnne nnns 13 Start up Tasks a SL eese dues at os aret a 16 Operating Temperature Limits Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluids 20 Transmitter Overpressure Ratings n enne ennt nnne 21 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack sss 22 Local Smart Meter Specifications nennen enne 24 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket enne 27 Zero Corrects Procedure for STD TIO u a a aa Lumu a h tette teeth then trenes 32 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter essen 36 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process cccc
86. The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process measurement requirements and the transmitter model Except for flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections process connections are made to 4 inch or inch NPT female connections in the process head of the transmitter s meter body For example a differential pressure transmitter comes with double ended process heads with 1 4 inch NPT connections but they can be modified to accept 2 inch NPT through optional flange adapters Some gauge pressure transmitters may have a inch NPT connection which mounts directly to a process pipe The most common type of pipe used is inch schedule 80 steel pipe Many piping arrangements use a three valve manifold to connect the process piping to the transmitter A manifold makes it easy to install and remove or rezero a transmitter without interrupting the process It also accommodates the installation of blow down valves to clear debris from pressure lines to the transmitter Figure 14 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a three valve manifold and blow down lines for a differential pressure transmitter being used to measure flow Figure 14 Typical 3 Valve Manifold and Blow Down Piping Arrangement To Downstream Tap To Upstream Tap Blow Down 3 Valve V Blow Down Valve Manifold N Valve Blow Down Piping Blow Down Piping To Low Pressure To High Pressure Side of Transmitter Side of Transmitter To W
87. VAI AW 00E VAI TCWSO3INI 5OI 4 Ade Yon SNUILdU S3I3W 3IUW38 0008VN3 A0S Sun SW3I3AVSVd AITING Sl OI 9 x33 NUILVOU SOQUGSVZVH NHILVOU SRQUGsvzvH NLN 00 90 01 ADS C A33 91202 3 00 40 40 C A33 266 662220 0812023 3190 NDISIA3S EvevOdlS DNIAV3 37595 LON OF y DSAU Z Ev2vO IS 3 1431V2 L30 1 5 00 90 0131va 3 INON 37925 WS OOEVWA TISCOW 33138 LAVWS NOILdO aslaw S3LOWSa OO0 VhWsl gt gt ONISMIA JSLYNASL IV 4 gt do H H L Dind UN Snlvavddy aalvioossy G31 411439 5 5 3313N339 310 NI Adds OH N3AUd 006 001 531035 k u YALLINSNVYL OOOSLS TH ONIAIM SLVYNASL 1 3 o F G 310 1N3WdIn93 MEE NE tN 1 Q31VIOUSSV 131411939 3343N39 X 31UND a ATddNS WS O0EVWS 33 Ud a L 006 001 S3lN3S Sl 9 x33 Y YALLINSNVYL 000 1S NUILVOUT SNUCAVZVH NUILVOU SNUCSVZVH NUON M 1 TI OT
88. With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and turn it on 2 DEREAD tlale Be sure any switches that may trip T R I PS jsiE C UR E D alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 NON VOL mlale INIo 1T T1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured Is Fic wonRk iN G and with es sample transmitter pip AG I P elon 4 A T ole Terr Initiate shift key selection RESET Prompt asks if you want to correct K I ETE PT pong Hae ips IR E S E T CORRECTS calibration data by resetting it to REGI default values If you do want to reset data go to next Step If you don t press CLR key to exit function 5 NON VOL III PE Bern Previous calibration CORRECTS ENTER S F C are removed and calibration is reset Yes to default characterization values as IPIT indicated by non critical status IC OJRIRIEIC TIS symbol on right hand side of display Symbol remains on display LIIIN T elt Taloa Tes until transmitter is recalibrated ATTENTION The accuracy of the reset transmitter will be approximately 0 2 at reference conditions See the Background paragraph in this section for more details 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 193 194 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model
89. also configure the transmitter s configuration database through displays at the Universal Station or GUS See the PM APM Smartline Integration Manual PM12 410 for details Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 61 6 2 Overview Continued SFC and ST 3000 transmitter memories Both the SFC and the ST 3000 transmitter have working memories as shown in Figure 24 They serve as temporary storage areas for data exchanged between the SFC and the transmitter during communications The transmitter also has a non volatile memory as the permanent storage area for a backup copy of all the data held in the working memory This memory retains its data even if the transmitter loses power The SFC has a second temporary storage area called the hold memory This memory supports the SFC s save and restore functions It serves as the temporary storage area for a configuration database saved from a transmitter until it can be restored in a transmitter Data in this memory can not be displayed or altered and it will be lost if the SFC is turned off Figure 24 shows the working relationship between SFC and transmitter memories during communications Figure 24 SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories ST 3000 Continued on next page 62 ST 3000 Release 300 and
90. bar 100 psi 7 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar Gauge Pressure 100 psi 7 bar 100 psi 7 bar 150 psi 10 3 bar 300 psi 21 bar 300 psi 21 bar 450 psi 31 bar 500 psi 35 bar 500 psi 35 bar 750 psi 52 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 4500 psi 310 bar 6000 psi 415 bar 10000 psi 690 bar 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar Absolute Pressure 500 psia 35 bar 6000 psi 415 bar 10000 psi 690 bar 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar 500 psia 35 bar 9000 psi 620 bar 15000 psi 1034 bar Full vacuum to 1550 mmHg Absolute 2 bar 750 psia 52 bar 3of4 34 ST 99 13 Addendum 10 04 Exhibit c Additions to Table Figure 53 ST 3000 Release 300 Electronic Housing Assembly See Figures 55 and 56 Models Figure STD110 57 STD120 57 STD125 57 STD130 57 STD170 57 STD904 57 58 STD924 57 58 STD930 57 58 STD974 57 58 Flange Mounted STF128 STF132 STF12F STF13F STF14F STF924 STF932 STF92F STF93F Single Head See Dual Head See GP Models Figure GP Models Figure STG140 59 STG944 60 STG170 59 STG974 60 STG180 59 Single Head See AP Models Figure STA122 59 STA140 59 STA922 59 STA940 59 5 Remote Diaphragm Seal Models STR12D LGP Models s STR13D STR14G STR14A STR17G 63 STR93D STR94G 63 Attention No replacemen
91. display value This procedure sets the display limit of the meter to represent minimum and maximim transmitter output 0 and 100 output Note Magnitude range and display values are set for both upper and lower if applicable display limits During normal operation the display range of the meter digital readout is 19 990 000 and is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible for the digits available up to 1 100th of a unit Setting Lower Display The procedure in Table 35 outlines the steps for setting the lower Values display limit to represent the 0 percent LRV output of the transmitter For example purposes the procedures in Tables 35 and 36 assume that the lower value is to be set at 0 and the upper value is to be set at 19 990 000 for a CUSTOM unit in a transmitter with a LINEAR output and the transmitter s present output is exactly 50 percent Continued on next page 110 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display You have completed units selection in Table 33 and U L appears on the display Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower display limit setting function ATTENTION This procedure is only applicable for Custom EUF engineering unit selection in a transmitter configured for LINEAR output con
92. down towards the flowline with a vent valve at the high point For gas measurement use a condensate leg and drain at the low point freeze protection may be required here See Appendix B for some suggested freeze protection solutions 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 39 Continued on next page 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued ATTENTION Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes The operating temperature limits for the device as outlined in Table 5 must not be exceeded Impulse piping may be used to reduce the temperature of the process that comes into contact with the transmitter meter body As a general rule there is a 56 degree C drop 100 degree F in the temperature of the process for every foot of 2 inch uninsulated piping Process connections Table 13 describes typical process connections for a given type of transmitter Table 13 Process Connections Transmitter Type Process Connection Differential Pressure e Process heads with 1 4 inch NPT female connection e Flange adapters and manifolds with 1 2 inch female connection are optional e Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2 or 3 inch ANSI class 150 flange Gauge Pressure Process head with 1 2 inch NPT female connection Series 100 e Process heads with 1 4 inch NPT female connection STG9x4 e In line 1 2 inch NPT female connection STGxxL e In line 72 inch
93. either lower or upper depending upon which limit you set first 3 If you change the transmitter s output conformity you must reconfigure the Local Smart meter as outlined in Tables 33 to 36 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 105 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration continued Table 32 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code Smart Meter Code Engineering Unit Transmitter Output Conformity EU0 Linear or Square Root EU1 inH2O EU2 mmHg EU3 PSI EU4 kPa T EU5 MPa EU6 mbar t Linear EU7 bar EU8 gicm2 EU9 kglom EUA mmH2O EUB inHg t EUC mH2O EUD GPM Square Root EUE GPH Square Root EUF Custom Linear or Square Root These selections have indicators on smart meter display T Use stick on labels provided for other engineering units Selecting Engineering The procedure in Table 33 outlines the steps for selecting the desired Units engineering units for a Local Smart Meter using its local adjustments on the face of the meter You will be selecting the unit of measurement that you want the smart meter to indicate during normal operation WARNING When the transmitter s end cap is removed the housing is not explosionproof Continued on next page 106 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s
94. for calibration pressure source to high pressure side of DP type transmitter 2 Turn on power supply and allow transmitter to stabilize its operation for approximately 30 minutes Turn on SFC 4 DE READ mlale INO T TT T TTTITTI Does not apply for bench calibration re SERES EL 5 NON VOL l Acknowledge prompt and establish ENTER Is Fjc communications with sample Yes TATSTTRISET transmitter PT 3011 to be calibrated LTIIIN TAG O er 181110 6 Adjust pressure source to apply pressure equal to LRV 0 7 E LRV 1 PR pon Present LRV setting If displayed eella z o s s value does not match applied pressure key in matching LRV value or adjust pressure accordingly 8 RESET RET T PTT sla Prompt asks if LRV is to be COR CORP RE CIT LRV calibrated to applied reference RECT pressure If it is to be calibrated go to next Step If it isn t press CLR key and try again Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 189 10 4 Calibrating Range with SFC continued Procedure continued Table 58 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 NON VOL F IRT HT T T IPO Bion Calibrates LRV to reference input ENTER WIOIRIK I INIG pressure for zero calibration Yes Pt p PIT
95. heated by I electric or steam 1 2 3 valve manifold standard type with 99 suitable temperature rating I Differential pressure transmitter with metal diaphragm seals Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 241 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Mechanical diaphragm seals continued Electric heating Figure B 5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal Impulse piping shut off valve and diaphragm seal distance must be as short as possible and insulated along with the process pipe or vessel Shut off valve Process pressure transmitter with Pipe union or metal diaphragm coupling seal Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process interfaces bodies than at their electronics Normally it is impractical to heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250 F 107 to 121 C without radiant and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics normally 200 F 93 C Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating coils and thermostats set at 200 F 93 C can assure viscosity of fluids which freeze below 180 F 82 C while assuring safe transmitter operation For water or similar lower temperature mediums the control can be set at 50 F 10 C to save energy and call for heat only when temperature and wind conditions require
96. level measurement application Refer to Figures 43 and 44 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 43 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter Block off Pipe Union valve no 1 Plug AN A Nee m Gauge Pressure Transmitter y d e 7 e Block off co Process valve no 2 Tee connector Figure 44 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type Transmitter To Process Head connection on meter body Block off valve Tap location at the minimum level to be measured Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 141 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter continued Procedure continued ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 43 we are assuming that piping arrangement includes a block off valve and a Tee connector If your piping does not include a Tee connector you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analo
97. limited to those applicable for the transmitter software The ST 3000 transmitters are available with what is called a write protect option It consists of a jumper located on the transmitter s PWA that you can position to allow read and write access or read only access to the transmitter s configuration database When the jumper is in the read only position you can only read view the transmitter s configuration and calibration data Note that the factory default jumper position is for read and write access There is no need to check the jumper position unless you want to change it Figure 20 shows the location of the write protect jumper on the PWA for Release 300 transmitters Figure 20 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections Power Connector Meter Connector Failsafe Direction Jumper 56 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 5 3 Making Initial Checks continued Local smart meter You can check the status of all the indicators on the Local Smart Meter display indications LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter The meter runs a brief self test whenever power is applied to the transmitter All the display indicators are lit during the self test as shown in Figure 21 Figure 21 Display With All Indicators Lit Honeywell 0 100 18 8 80 FLOW OUTPUT MODE ANALOG InH50 CHECK STATUS 2 LOWER GPH mmHg VALUE KNOWN VALUE GPM PSI A
98. made of the same material as the Process Heads except for Kits with carbon steel Process Heads which include stainless steel Pipe Plug Vent Plug and Vent Bushing NOTE 2 The Kit for Process Heads without side vent drain does not include Pipe Plugs K1 6 of 8 34 ST 99 22 Addendum to 33 ST 25 14 10 04 Table 5 Pressure Specification and Ratings Summary Comparisons Transmitter Upper Range Maximum Allowable Overpressure Rating Model Limit Working Pressure Note 1 Note 1 Previous New Design Previous New Design STD110 10 inches H2O 50 psi Same as 50 psi Same as 25 mbar 3 5 bar previous 3 5 bar previous STD120 400 inches H2O 3000 psi 4500 psi 3000 psi 4500 psi STD924 1 bar 207 bar 310 bar 207 bar 310 bar STD125 600 inches H2O s 1 5 bar STD130 100 psi STD930 7 bar STD170 3000 psi n 207 bar Note 1 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure and Overpressure Rating may vary with materials of construction and with process temperature For more specific information refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide In transmitters with Graphite Gaskets rating of 50 psi remains unchanged while ratings of 4500 psi are reduced to 3625 psi 250 bar Flange Adapters with Graphite Gaskets have a 3000 psi rating 10 04 34 ST 99 22 Addendum to 33 ST 25 14 7 of 8 8 of 8 34 ST 99 22 Addendum to 33 ST 25 14 10 04 Honeywell
99. of this nameplate C 13 G EEx nA IIC T5 Ta 40 93 C T6 Ta 40 TO 78 ZONE 2 SUPPLY lt 42V 23 ENCLOSURE IP 66 67 THE 273000 MAY BE COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING US PATENTS 4 502335 4 553 104 4 567 466 4 592 002 4 734873 4 735 090 4 888 992 5 765 436 5811890 6 041 659 51452618 001 ISS B 6 055 633 THEIR FOREIGN COUNTERPARTS AND OTHER PATENTS PENDING Nameplate 50003885 001 4 20 mA DE multiple certification nameplate The following is a representation of this nameplate LCIE 02 ATEX 6100 X EEx ia T4 Ta 40 TO 93 C 11 1 G 5 Ta 40 TO 85 C T6 Ta 40 TO 70 C Ul 30V Il 100 mA P i 12W Li 150uH Ci 42 nF N 0344 LCIE 02 ATEX 6099 X EEx d IIC Ta 40 TO 93 C 9Il 2 G SUPPLY i 6 Ta 40 TO 78 C SUPPLY 11 42 VDC lt ANG seme DO NOT OPEN WHILE ENERGIZED ENCLOSURE IP 66 67 THE ST 3000 MAY BE COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING U S PATENTS 4 502 335 4 553 104 4 567 466 4 502 002 4 734 873 4 735 090 4 888 982 5 765 496 5 811 890 6 041 659 6 055 633 THEIR FOREIGN COUNTERPARTS AND 50003885 001 155 A OTHER PATENTS PENDING 4 of 10 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 6 04 Specific Parameters for Intrinsic Safety Special conditions for safe use Intrinsic Safety X Specific Parameters for Flameproof Installation Special conditions for safe use Flameproof Installation 6 04
100. reason and because the tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical the IEC enclosure classification designations cannot be exactly equated with NEMA enclosure type numbers Basically the IEC designation consists of the letters IP followed by two numerals The first characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid foreign objects entering the enclosure The second characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to the harmful ingress of water Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 263 D 3 Enclosure Ratings continued IEC Designations Table D 6 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure continued type numbers to IEC enclosure classification designations The NEMA types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC classifications for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert from IEC classifications to NEMA types Table D 6 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification NEMA Enclosure IEC Enclosure pee Number Classification Designation IP 10 IP 11 IP 54 IP 14 35 IP 54 4 and 4X IP 56 5 6 and 6P 12 and 12K 13 NOTE This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529 264 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 A
101. s nonvolatile memory Replace electronics module PWA E L EJ C T R O N I CIS lt Bl fault 1 PIT 3101 1 Transmitters random access Replace electronics module PWA 1 5 lt c gt memory fault 1 PIT 3104 1 Transmitter s programmable read Replace electronics module PWA E UE CT R O NI I IC S lt D gt only memory PROM fault tlale Io T T TT TIT 1 Communications unsuccessful Check loop wiring and SFC AjR o ujND connections If error persists replace transmitter Is T A T U s 1 41 SPAN correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure it 5 5 s PlA N clolRIR acceptable limits Could be that matches calibrated range value transmitter was in output mode Check meter body Do a URV CORRECT procedure S T A T U S PIT 3 0 1 1 4 ZERO correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure it 1815 5 z E RIo clolr R acceptable limits Could be that matches calibrated range value either INPUT was incorrect or Check meter body Do an LRV transmitter was in output mode CORRECT procedure during a CORRECT procedure mlale TT 7 SFC failed a communications Check polarity and try again c o M M diagnostic check Could be an Press STAT and do any S
102. safe application CSA 51204242 For intrinsically safe application CENELEC 51204243 Transmitter Dimension drawings for individual transmitter models are available and Dimension Drawings are listed in the ST 3000 Release 300 installation guide document supplied with your transmitter If you need a copy of a drawing please determine the appropriate drawing number and contact your Honeywell representative to obtain a copy 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 233 234 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 155 REVISION amp DATE APPD A RELEASED 062383 d 2 REV D 9 10 91 3 IREVD 4 3 95 B C0952172 10 e B 4 REV D 07 07 00 N F202130 m C AS GROUND RECEIVER C D METER um gt Senet tae MD ST3000 TRANSMITTER lt IN NON HAZARDOUS is AREA 650 n LOOP RESISTANCE SMART FIELD 250 E COMMUNICATOR AMx 108 42 5 OPERATING VOLTAGE KM CROSS HATCHED AREA IS USABLE OPERATING AREA BH A MINIMUM OF 250 OHMS OF LOOP RESISTANCE gt lt IS NECESSARY TO SUPPORT COMMUNICATION Non Lightning Proof Option c F SMART FIELD COMMUNICATOR MAY BE CONNECTED AT ANY POINT IN THE Sht Non Imtrinsicoly Safe sht 2 Non Intrinsicaly Safe LOOP BETWEEN THE BARRIERS S AND THE ST3000 TRANSMITTER PXc AT WHICH CONNECTIONS ARE ACCESSIBLE Drawn 0633 THERE MUST BE A MINIMUM SERIES RESISTANCE OF 250 OHMS ERI Honeywell FW _ BETW
103. setting if needed 11 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 136 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank Procedure The procedure in Table 42 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter in a liquid level measurement application for a pressurized tank with a liquid filled wet reference leg Refer to Figure 42 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 42 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized Tank z TIONS Valve B Plug D Plug C at zero level Valve Tap location at the minimum level to be measured Differential Pressure Transmitter ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 42 we are assuming that e The tank is empty and the reference leg is filled e The high pressure HP side of the transmitter is connected to the wet reference leg Note that the transmitter will work if the HP side is connected to the bottom of the tank but not within the guaranteed accuracy specifications e The transmitter is mounted below the zero level of the tank so h is greater than zero If h equals zero plug C is eliminated from the piping and the LP vent is opened instead Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 137 7 7 Liquid L
104. small contact interface area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid reduces the mixing of the two fluids You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than the process fluid to inhibit mixing It also must have freezing and boiling temperatures compatible with the range of temperatures existing at the site including the heated interface WARNING WARNING The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing liquid with their process fluid A reliable sealing liquid is a 50 50 percent by volume solution of ethylene glycol and water This solution has a specific gravity of 1 070 at 60 F 15 a freezing temperature of 34 F 36 C and a boiling temperature of 225 F 106 C at atmospheric pressure Conventional antifreeze liquids for automobile coolant systems such as Prestone and Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 237 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Sealing liquid method continued Zerex are solutions of ethylene glycol with some rust inhibitors and possibly leak sealants added they may be used in place of pure ethylene glycol Another sealing liquid used in many chemical plants is dibutylphalate an oily type liquid with a specific gravity of 1 045 at 70 F 21 C It has a boiling point 645 F 340 C and does not freeze so it can be used down to about 20 F 30 C Figures B 1 and B 2 show
105. summary continued Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration continued Determine Lower Range Value LRV and Upper Range Value URV to be used for setting range values See procedure in Table 25 or 26 for range setting details Use LRv and URV keys to call up respective SFC prompts for keying in range values or setting range values to applied pressures Set LRV and URV to desired values through SFC prompts LRV 1 URV 1 See procedures in Tables 28 and 29 for DE parameter selections Press SHIFT and MENU ITEM keys to call up DE configuration menu Select appropriate DE configuration parameters through SFC prompt DE CONF continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 69 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration decision summary continued Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration Continued Use buttons on face of Local Smart Meter or SFC to select engineering units and range values as applicable See procedures in Tables 33 to 36 for configuring Local Smart Meter for operation 70 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 2 Overview Continued SFC interface Keep these three basic Interface characteristics in mind when you use characteristics the SFC to configure a transmitter e Ifthe displaye
106. supplied into inlet cavity of process head 2 Carefully seat Teflon white gasket into adapter groove 3 Thread adapter onto 1 2 inch process pipe and align mounting holes in adapter with holes in end of process head as required Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7 16 20 hex head bolts Example Installing adapter on process head O O Process O Head Filter Screen Teflon Gasket Flange Adapter 7 16 x 20 Bolts ATTENTION Apply an anti seize compound on the stainless steel bolts prior to threading them into the process head Evenly torque flange adapter bolts to a torque of 27 1 Nm 1 4 Nm 20 ft lbs 1 0 ft Ibs 42 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter The transmitter is designed to operate in a two wire power current loop with loop resistance and power supply voltage within the operating range shown in Figure 16 Figure 16 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters 1440 120007 Operating Area NOTE A minimum of Loop ur SZ E LL 250 Ohms of loop Resistance resistance is ohms necessary to support 650 communications Loop resistance equals barrier resistance plus 50 wire resistance plus receiver resistance Also 45 volt operation is permitted if not an intrinsically safe installation 250
107. to apply head Allow system to stabilize at head pressure H to meter body Then open pressure LP vent Continued on next page 132 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 40 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 4 DE READ Tals INO 0000 Be sure any switches that may trip T R i PS SECURED alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NON VOL Confirm that TRIPS secured ENTER wolRkK IN e and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 DP NO 1319141111 6 m LIR It T T Bona Read present LRV setting 0 18 2 20 Psi TT pt asks if you want to set LRV SER 3pPIeei pressure NON VOL IR YE HIT T Jale LRV is set to applied head pressure L F L feist Tr 7 ee olur PL Call up output for display OUT isirje 10 PUT 1 TPIT Bloa Read 0 output on display for l j j j j corresponding zero line pressure plus head pressure H For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output 8 Close plug C 9 Op
108. to lock in third digit and activate next active digit Readout now displays next active digit which will be BLANK unless upper value was set to 1 before Press and hold to scroll backward through values Press and hold to scroll forward through values O OO N O Continued on next page 118 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase button to set digit to 1 or 1 digit value setting is set to 1 Decrease button to set it to BLANK Honeywell v v 00 19990 ANALOG K v bs Press to set 1 Press to set 1 digit as BLANK digit as 1 12 Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in 1 Readout now displays sign segment which digit and activate sign segment will be BLANK for positive values unless upper value was set for negative values 13 Press Increase button to set sign segment before to minus sign for negative values or Decrease button to set it to BLANK for positive Honeywell values 2 Sign segment is BLANK for positive values and minus sign for negative values Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 119 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting
109. topics Section See Page Introduction Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter About this section This section provides information about installing the ST 3000 transmitter It Includes procedures for mounting piping and wiring the transmitter for operation 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 25 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Summary You can mount all transmitter models except flush mount models and those with Integral flanges to a 2 inch 50 millimeter vertical or horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket or a bracket of your own Flush mount models are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank by a 1 weld nipple Those models with integral flanges are supported by the flange connection Figure 8 shows typical bracket mounted and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison Figure 8 Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations Angle Mounting Bracket Flange Transmitter Connection Flange 24118 Continued on next page 26 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Dimensions Detailed dimension drawings for given transmitter series and types are listed in the back of the Installation Guide Part number 34 ST 33 39 for reference Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown
110. vapors of equivalent hazard Class II Description Sone Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including aluminum magnesium and their commercial alloys and other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts including carbon black charcoal coal or other dusts that have been sensitized by other materials so that they present an explosion hazard Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in Group E or F including flour wood grain and other dusts of similarly hazardous characteristics Continued on next page 254 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Methods of Protection The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in given locations XP Division 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Temperature Classification Limit energy of sparks under normal and fault conditions Keeps flammable gas out No arcs sparks or hot surfaces under normal conditions Keeps flammable gas out Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous classified location must also be classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to either 40 C 104 F or the maximum operating ambient of the equipment whichever is greater The ma
111. ve reference leg 7 eT T Terr pieni Call up output for display stele T ELT PUT 1 T loaa Read 0 output on display for 1 19d py corresponding empty tank pressure plus head pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output Continued on next page 138 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank continued Procedure continued Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 8 If you Then can not fill tank go to Step 9 can fill tank to goto Step 10 desired full scale level 9 Key in URV that is equal to full tank Go to Step 14 pressure See section 6 7 in this manual for details on keying in a range value 10 Close plugs C and D 11 Open valves A and B Fill tank to desired full scale level 12 F HT T Bona Read present URV setting 100 15 01 09 2 G PUTRI 1 IPT Prompt asks if you want to set URV to applied pressure POE luiRIVI H1 IPIT URV is set to full tank pressure 5 Bi afar Ta o es 13 TT olur 1 T Call up output for display with full Bur 5 WIORIKIITINIGI tank
112. when Step 4 is valid Otherwise this keystroke exits DE CONF function Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 95 6 10 Selecting Message Format DE Mode Only continued Procedure continued Table 29 Selecting Message Format continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 6 NON VOL ole popa Message exchange is working ENTER STFC KING ff Yes LIN bP PT 39111 READ iY L T T T Parameter change is loaded in transmitter SFC is ready for next function Keystroke summary Figure 34 shows keystroke summary for selecting the message format for transmitter in DE mode for quick reference Figure 34 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format DE CONF DE CONF MENU ITEM NON VOL 96 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC Background You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower limit settings for the Local Smart Meter s digital readout through the SFC Configuring the Smart Ifyou initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed Meter on the Local Smart Meter the Local Smart Meter will respond to the command it receives last In other words the last command wins e The Local Smart Meter does not have to be installed for you to configure it th
113. 0 lt Ta lt 93 Zone 2 Parameters U x 42V Temp Code TA at Ta 93 C Maximum Ambient Temp Code T5 at Ta 80 C Maximum Ambient Temp Code T6 at 65 C Maximum Ambient Continued on next page 262 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 D 3 Enclosure Ratings NEMA and IEC Recognition IEC Classifications NEMA Standards IEC Designations The NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association enclosure classifications are recognized in the US The IEC Publication 529 Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications The following paragraphs provide a discussion of the Comparison Between NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and IEC Enclosure Classification Designations IEC Publication 529 Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures provides a system for specifying the enclosures of electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by the enclosure IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against mechanical damage of equipment risk of explosion or conditions such as moisture produced for example by condensation corrosive vapors fungus or vermin NEMA Standards Publication 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum does test for environmental conditions such as corrosion rust icing oil and coolants For this
114. 0 3N m 10 20 3N m 1 0N m 20 3 N m 1 0N m 20 3 N m 1 0 Transmitter 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 7 6x20UNF NA NA 258N m 13N m 19 0 Lb Ft 1 0 Lb Ft M12 x 1 75 258 N m 4 13N m NA NA NA 19 0 Lb Ft 1 0 Lb Ft All Other DP M12x 175 63 7 N m4 32N m NA NA d e 47 0 Lb Ft 2 4 Lb Ft 7 6x20UNF NA NA 63 7N m 3 2N m INA 47 0 Lb Ft 24 Lb Ft 7 6x14UNC 67 8N m 34Nm 488N m 24N m 56 9 N m 4 28N m 56 9 N m 28 50 0 Lb Ft 2 5 Lb Ft 36 0 Lb Ft 1 8 Lb Ft 42 0 Lb Ft 2 1 Lb Ft 42 0 Lb Ft 2 1 Lb Ft 3 8x16UNC 39 3 2 0 NA 39 3N m 2 0N m 39 3 N m 20 N m 29 Lb Ft 1 5 Lb Ft 29 Lb Ft 1 5Lb Ft 29 Lb Ft 1 5 16 M8 x 1 25 27 1 N m 44N_ INA NA NA 20 0 Lb Ft 1 0 Lb Ft 5 16 18 NA 20 3N m 1 0N m 20 3 1 0 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 174 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 9 4 Replacing PWA About the PWA The circuitry in the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters 15 of the single Electronics Board PWA design The PWA contains connectors for the flex tape conductor from the sensor the loop power wires and a connector for the optional smart meter cable Procedure The procedure in Table 55 outlines the steps for replacing the PWA Table 55 Replacing PWA Step A
115. 00 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Appendix D Hazardous Locations Reference Reference Information is provided to clarify the hazardous location installation Information requirements in North America and internationally An explanation of the applicable enclosure classification systems is also provided D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Electrical Codes Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous classified locations of the United States is conducted under the provisions of the National Electrical Code NEC ANSI NFPA 70 Article 500 and within Canada under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code CEC C22 1 Part 1 Section 18 Classes Hazardous classified locations in both the United States and Canada are categorized into one of these three classes Description of Hazardous Location I Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures Presence of combustible dusts powders or grains Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings Divisions The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of risk present Description of Risk Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors or combustible dust in suspension are continuously intermittently or periodically present under normal operating conditions Locations in which flammable
116. 1 Ill l grams per square centimeter T 11 F u Ni rs 11 ILLE i imminisi I2ic T 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 T m T T K T T m T T u Ni rs ty 1 8 2 kilograms square centimeter 1 lll temle Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 79 6 6 Procedure continued Selecting Unit of Measurement continued Table 24 Pre Programmed Engineering Units for Selection continued IF you want URV LRV etc D THEN sequentially press key until displayed in display shows inches of mercury at 32 F 0 C uINT1TT s 1 sofia PET Ty 1 liln Hig 32 millimeters of water at 4 C 3 felt spots 39 2 F EE 1 2 4 meters of water at 4 C 39 2 F 1 popa 1 fa fet A T M inches of water at 60 F 15 6 C u N rs 1 PT 1 210 6 01 80 ST 3000 Release 300 SFC Model 575103 User s Manual 6 05 6 7 Setting Range Values Using SFC Background ATTENTION Procedure 1 You can set the LRV and by either keying in the desired values through the SFC keyboard or applying the corresponding LRV and URV pressures directly to the transmitter We factory calibrate ST 3000 Sma
117. 1 1 No temperature compensation data exists for D A N o pfa c tlelmlel converter s rfA TIu s fer 111 Meter body temperature is too high SIE N S O R RITE M P STATS IPTE Status is unknown Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 199 11 4 Critical failures Table Diagnostic Messages continued Table 62 summarizes the critical SFC status message displays A critical failure has these effects on SFC operation e Only ID OUTPUT and STATUS functions remain operational e The critical status message is displayed for three seconds followed by the applicable status message Run the status check to view messages again e The transmitter s output is driven to its failsafe direction upscale or downscale 62 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures Message Description SORES ERG PiR1o M Characterization PROM failure olu T P 1 P T 1 0 11 No temperature compensation data exists for E LJE C T JRPOJNITICIS lt Al gt calculations 1 0 1 1 Transmitter s nonvolatile memory NVM fault E L EJC T JRJONN IIICIS lt gt olu T P 1 P T 0 1 1 Transmitter s random access memory RAM fault RI o
118. 10 E LRV 0 G SET NON VOL ENTER Yes 1 1 PTI soil 2 0909 Pishi PT steps ay isie Pr 3911 119 025 terishi Read present LRV setting Prompt asks if you want to set LRV to applied pressure LRV is set to applied pressure 11 Close Tee connector and slowly open block off valve to apply process pressure to transmitter 12 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to zero and full scale pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 13 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 144 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter Procedure ATTENTION The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge pressure GP type transmitter in a pressure or liquid level measurement application Refer to Figures 45 and 46 for the flush mount transmitter arrangement and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections For the procedure in Table 43 we are assuming that piping arrangement
119. 11 3011114 I IN CIR E AS E D 4 UTP 1 PT 1 jc R R E CIT 2 10 vi olur 1 T felt Gradually decrease output to 4mA PREV 1 cjolulN Tis or 1V reading Repeat this Step as required ejot iP 1 PT 1j STF iC K ING L euT P 1 301114 ID E CIR E AS ED 4 eUT e 301114 CIO R RE CIT 2 11 eT olor P 1 T eo 14 Call up output for display OUT 5 PUT ESTE EUER PT Present output signal level in mpi asas Continued on next page 186 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal continued Procedure continued Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 12 V 1 eir 3 0 1 1 Key 100 as desired output level in m Su TP 11 PT 3011 II i TT yet PE 2 eg 13 PTT PET Set output to 100 ENTER STF iC wo Rik iNe L L 1 1 es OU TP 1 PTI 3011 ngg jejej p Lg lg 14 RESET olur 1 T felt pope Calibrate output to 100 K Fei 10 Ou TP 11 PTI 3014 o R R E CITI D ACI 58 15 Check that milliammeter or voltmeter reading is 20mA or 5V If reading is The
120. 128 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 39 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter in a flow measurement application Refer to Figure 39 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 39 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter Plug F HP Blockoff Valve B VaveA p Valve C Differential Pressure Transmitter ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 39 we are assuming that all the valves on the three valve manifold and the block off valves were closed at Installation Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Open equalizer valve C See Figure 39 for sample piping arrangement Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 129 7 4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter continue
121. 17 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Block Electronics Electronics Terminal Housing Terminal Housing Block Internal Ground Terminal Block Internal Ground Terminal 3 Screw Terminal Block 5 Screw Terminal Block Lightning Protection Option LP TPS reference Transmitters that are to be digitally integrated to Honeywell s TPS system will be connected to the Smart Transmitter Interface Module in the Process Manager Advanced Process Manager or High Performance Process Manager through a Field Termination Assembly Details about the TPS system connections are given in the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration Manual PM12 410 which is part of the TDC 3000 system bookset Allen Bradley PLC If you are digitally integrating the ST 3000 to an Allen Bradley PLC the same FTA and wiring procedures used with Honeywell s TPS system are also used with the Allen Bradley 1771 and 1746 platforms For more information contact ProSoft Technology Inc 800 326 7066 or http www psft com Continued on next page 44 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Wiring connections The procedure in Table 16 shows the steps for connecting power to the a installation transmitter For loop wiring and external wiring diagrams refer to the rawings installation drawings presented in Section 13 Detailed drawings are provided for trans
122. 3 LOIN T Del 5 pooo Initiates shift key selection SU TWI Nio TsT7 eloa Both SFC and XMTR software IS FiCi 41 15 x M T R 3 8 versions appear in display Note that only SFC version appears when SFC is not connected to transmitter or SHIFT and ID keys have not yet been pressed for transmitter in DE mode 4 CLR T ple Tsi loloto Exit function SFC is READY for NO READY Analog and DE modes In the analog transmission mode the transmitter sends a proportional 4 to 20 milliampere output signal that can be used as a compatible analog input signal to a controller or a recorder in the control room Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 55 5 3 Making Initial Checks continued Analog and DE modes continued Software version compatibility Write protect option A transmitter in the digital DE mode can communicate in a direct digital fashion with Honeywell s TPS system and Allen Bradley PLCs The digital signal can include process variable as well as configuration database data depending upon the broadcast format selected during configuration The SFC model STS103 with software version 5 0 or greater is fully compatible with all Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 transmitters The SFC will operate with transmitters that have older software versions but functions will be
123. 30752453 503 12 feet 3 6 meters long 30752453 505 20 feet 6 meters long 4 Interface cable assembly with EZ hooks 1 30752453 502 6 feet 1 8 meters long 30752453 504 12 feet 3 6 meters long 30752453 506 20 feet 6 meters long 30752438 501 DC battery charger AA Nicad cell 120 Vac 1 30753739 501 DC battery charger AA Nicad cell 240 Vac Universal European plug 1 7 30752834 501 Carrying case vinyl 1 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Kit 30753194 001 Replacement hardware kit K1 Bumper recess 4 K2 Screw metric M3 socket head 6 K3 Cover battery compartment 1 K4 Label battery cover 1 K6 Carry strap 1 K7 Harness assembly power charger 1 K10 Actuator 1 K12 Socket head wrench kit metric 1 Contents 1 Hex head socket wrench size 2 5 mm 1 Hex head socket wrench size 3 mm 1 Hex head socket wrench size 4 mm Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 231 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 81 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts Reference Spares for Part Number Description Figure Key 1 10 10 100 100 Nmbr Nmbr Units Units 1000 Units Electronics Housing Assembly Figs 55 and 56 51309397 501 Electronics Module Assembly 55 5 1 1 2 2 4 30757503 001 Series 100 900 housing seal kit 55 amp 56 K1 1 1 2 2 4 51205897 501 Series 100 900 terminal assembly without lightning 56 3 K2 1 1
124. 5 090 4 768 382 4 787 250 4 888 992 5 811 690 5 875 150 5 765 436 4 734 873 6 041 659 and other patents pending 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual iii References Publication Publication Binder Binder Title Number Title Number Smart Field Communicator 34 ST 11 14 Model STS103 Operating Guide ST 3000 Smart Transmitter 34 ST 33 39 Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 Installation Guide For R400 and later PM APM Smartline Transmitter PM12 410 Implementation TDC 2045 Integration Manual PM APM Optional Devices gt IF 09 gt gt Symbol Definitions This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual WARNING risk of electrical shock This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 4 Vpeak or 60 VDC may be accessible ATTENTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD hazards Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices Protective Earth PE terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth green or green yellow supply system conductor Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection
125. 5 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of transmitters with silicone fill fluids See transmitter specifications for temperature limits of ST 3000 transmitters with alternative fill fluids Table 5 Operating Temperature Limits Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluids Transmitter Type and Model Ambient Temperature Process Interface Temperature Draft Range STD110 40 A 70 40 to 158 40 is 70 40 to 158 Differential Pressure STD125 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 85 40 to 185 STD120 STD130 STD170 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STD904 STD924 STD930 STD974 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 Gauge Pressure STG140 STG170 STG180 STG14L STG17L STG18L 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STG14T 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 150 T 40 to 302 T STG93P 15 to 65 5 to 149 15 to 95 TT 5 to 203 TT STG944 STG974 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 STG90L STG94L STG97L STG98L 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 110 40 to 230 Absolute PressureSTA122 12L 40 to 93 40 to 200 See Specification Sheet STA140 14L 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 80 40 to 176 STA922 92L 40 to 85 40 to 185 See Specification Sheet STA940 94L 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 80 40 to 176 Flange Mounted STF128 STF132 STF924 STF932 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 175 40 to 350 Pseudo Flanged Head STF12F STF13F STF92F STF93F 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 93 40 to 200 STF14F 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 85 40 to 185 Gauge
126. 6 Z 3 2 ONIAVAd 37995 LON DG Y DAT E EV2vOZIG 37140v2 230 1 00 90 0131 A33 3192 VvcV0clS gt pu Seno 3 Evev0elS 006 001 S3I33S N AW OOEVWA amp 414 9 IldO dSsLl4aW 3LOW3 000 NIMIA 31VN231 IV 006 001 S3I33S S3lLINSNVSI 000615 00015 DNISIA 4LVNA4SL IV IVNV evwd S SALON G33133AND07 33I33V8 SNLVAVddY Q31VIQUSSV 31311839 2371333 C ALON LNAWdINDSA IU31NU2 31U0ND G vy SALON AW O0EVWA OIL 91 x33 I1S3U SAUGSVZVH C83133AND0 33 33V8 Snivavddv 031 12055 31311939 33 13N39 q 31DN 1N3NdI083 1081 09 31UN5 Adds 33 Ud NOILVO QSVZVH NUN SNIAV3I 37995 LON OT Y L3U v LHS 00 90 0131 G 3 A38 31v35 Everoeis Euo SA vOEV2YOSIS ut JAYI 2 C3N2 NOILdO 3138 1VeD3LNI EvevdelS
127. 6 05 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Figure 9 Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter cont d Mount transmitter vertically to assure best accuracy Position spirit balance on press of AP body Leveling Inline models ure connection surface 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 31 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Precautions for For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span you must Mounting ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it You do this by ANC leveling the transmitter side to side and front to back See Figure 9 for Differential Pressure Suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance You Spans continued must also zero the transmitter by following the steps in Table 10 below Table 10 Zero Corrects Procedure for STD110 Step Action 1 Attach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely tighten the mounting bolts 2 Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure HP and low pressure LP heads to eliminate the affects of any surrounding air currents 3 Connect 24 Vdc power to the transmitter and connect a digital voltmeter or SFC to read the transmitter s output See Figures 18 and 38 for typical SFC connection or connect a voltmeter across the 250 ohm resistor if desired 4 Use the SFC and establish communications with the transm
128. 6 inH2O URV 15 36 inH2O ATTENTION The specific gravity of water at 60 F 15 6 C is 1 00 Continued on next page 150 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals continued Procedure continued Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 10 F URV HT T T jetty Bon Read present URV setting 100 8 9 0 2 G luiRIVI 1 IP T Prompt asks if you want to set URV 5 to applied pressure NON VOL UR V 1 IP T 3 611 URV is set to full tank pressure 151118 PRP lol F es 11 nur Call output for display with full DU Is Fic wolR K INIe tank pressure applied PUT OU TP 1 32 1 1 Read 100 output on display for 1129 g j corresponding full tank pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA 100 output 12 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to empty and full tank pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter
129. 754419 019 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st steel NACE bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg optional flange adapter 4 K11 Not Shown Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2 218 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 219 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 59 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body K1 Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts In Figure 59 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 2 See Table 74 Process head GP AP models 1 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without head GP AP Models 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without head GP AP Models 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 30754154 002t Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except STG180 3 sets 30754154 003T Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body 3 sets K2 O ring 3 Continued on next page 220 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59 continued Key Part Numb
130. 83 016 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 300 wl st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 009 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 150 wl st stl bolts 51204983 010 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 021 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 022 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 011 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT Hastelloy 150 wl st stl bolts 51204983 012 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT Hastelloy 150 wl st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 025 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 026 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 037 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 038 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 027 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 028 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 029 Flange adapter kit 1 st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 030 Flange adapter kit 1 st stl 300 wl st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 039 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 040 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 031 Flange adapter
131. 83ANDO 8I3IeIVE ae SNLYAYddY 131919055 TIA C31 411839 MOTA F js ILON A ddns 33ADd 006 001 S3IN3S 5 MJLLINSNVMHL 00015 2 310N III 55 70 9 43 I SSV12 m q 2 8 V dnUMD I SSV12 3083SNININI 3113023 34VS ATIVOISNIMINI 4 91X3 nA ooN osSsqHZ s lt sssK Z g ona ce sa ae NOILVYSO NOILYOU I lt KG 31IdISSV 129 SNOUCAVZVH T TT OT 5 8 UN 2 9 S v 2 LN Y DNIAVAC 3725 LON HQ DMG 6 2r2t02 JILJIVO 630 6 0079070131 J A3N Zp2p0zIg Ey Mmo en WO OO0EVWA TSCOW 33138 IVLIDIC 0 NOILdO 83L13W 3lD39 OOOEWS c DNISIA SLYNASL IV MOTIJA y gay o o O H F 3i H LNAWdINO 4 9 9 SILON O CI3L8 3ANUO 3I3Ielel V8 71051309 SnlVavddv q31VIOUSSV a O3LJILN32 e aimo fo 959 Add 5 AG 00 vuWel 83 Dd A E SH 006 001 S3IN3S 3 000615 qe O b TH ONIAIM SLVNASL TV 4 3 a a 310 1N3WdIRn93 3 Q 3 9 SALON 3 Gi3bN3ANDO N3IN
132. 9 Saving and Restoring a Database Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring for Be sure to put analog loop into transmitter with database to be saved manual mode and turn it on 2 DE READ miale T T T 00 Be sure any switches that may trip TIR I PS S E C UIRIE DI alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 NONSVOL Tae INO 1T TT 1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER c Iwlo R K iN and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 PIT B n 4 B sit Call up first configuration parameter SANE COIN FORMI T Ye I 1 5 A sr Call up next configuration NEXT r cloln il l parameter 6 AP sir Call up next configuration Dou ISIEN sO R J parameter 7 AU Isit IcloN Filo Call up next configuration NEXT SIE R 1 9 7 7 5 1j2 2 2 parameter 8 AP sit Call up save restore function NEXT 5 RiE ST ORIE 9 NON VOL slal vle 5 Prompt asks if you want to save ISIAVEL DATA 2 database from this transmitter es 10 NON NEE SIAVE DATA Prompt asks for confirmation of ENTER Yes ATRIET vjoju jsjujRIEfe database save function Conti
133. ALd 006 001 531435 3 YALLNSNVYL 00015 KE ONISI 4LVYNASL IV 2 Nanaimo Gale ear oaino9 5 Snivavdav G31VIO9USSV ES G3IJILS8 32 YS lt ALON 3R 0 M Dd 8 2 310 III 85519 9 4 3 dNDAD II 85919 _ dNDAD T 55919 006 001 531435 ANSASNIALNI 31190093S 339S ATIVOISNIALNI YALLNSNVYL 00015 93 NOTLVSO C 3LJISSV 19 SNUANXYZYH NUILVOLU SOUGSVZVH NLN v bI m I 2 I Sgt ir OT 9 ONIAVAC 37995 LON UG Y DAG v evevO2 JIVI 640 t LHS 00 90 031vd 3 A34 3192 00 0 0 avav ey evevoels Pasu x CN NOILdO 3138 19453 m t 5 k 31l1D N 1N3Nd1083 CL 3 9 S3IDND ILAJANDI XITANA I 1NH9 3 SNLVaAVdd 03191308857 NOTI3A E 59 31DN A lddn s XIADA T 006 001 531435 YALLINSNVAL 000 1S g J310N III SS 19 9 4 3 dn sN9 I 55979 q 2 a8V dNDAD I SSV13 I ANOASNIALNI SLIANDAS SAVS ATIVOISNIALNI 4 91X3 E NOILYOU 1 Q8 VZVH NLIN lt 3IdISSV 100 SNUCAVYZVH I TT OT 6 Z S p 2 r SNIAVSNGI 37995 LON DG Y DMG S 2v2vOgc JIVI
134. ATEX4 you must use a power supply that includes a voltage limiting device that will keep the voltage to the transmitter from exceeding 42 Vdc You can achieve this by using a battery as the supply or one of these voltage limiting means e Double wound mains transformer per BS 3535 or equivalent e An adequately rated zener diode whose voltage is not significantly higher than the rated voltage e An adequately rated semiconductor voltage regulator When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection you must connect a wire from the transmitter to ground as shown in Figure 18 to make the protection effective We recommend that you use a size 8 AWG American Wire Gage 8 37mm bare or green covered wire Figure 18 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection Electronics Housing Connect to Earth Ground Continued on next page 46 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Conduit seal WARNING Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I Division 1 Group A Hazardous Classified Location in accordance with ANSI NFPA 70 the US National Electrical Code NEC require a LISTED explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit within 18 inches of the transmitter Crouse Hinds type EYS EYD or EYSX EYDX are examples of LISTED explosionproof seals that meets this requirement Transm
135. Adapters and with B7M alloy steel bolts 51452867 150 Monel Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts 51452867 350 Monel Flange Adapters and with 316 SS non NACE bolts 51452867 130 Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with carbon steel bolts 51452867 330 Hastelloy C Flange Adapters and with 316 SS non NACE bolts Each 1 2 inch NPT Flange Adapter Kit includes ete ets Gasket Flange Adapter eem 2 Sx Rena 1 2 inch NPT Flange Adapter eee 2 KC suya naa Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 50 inches long Flange Adapter 4 Blind Flange Adapter Kits 51452867 100 SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit with Carbon Steel bolts 51452867 200 SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit with A286 SS NACE bolts 51452867 300 SS Blind Flange Adapter Kit with 316 SS non NACE bolts 51452867 400 SS Blind Flange Adapters and B7M alloy steel bolts Each Blind Flange Adapter Kit includes Gasket Flange Adapter eme 2 Kb Lotes Blind Flange Adapter meme 2 span ua ee Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 50 inches long Flange Adapter 4 10 04 34 ST 99 22 Addendum to 33 ST 25 14 5 of 8 Table 4 Process Head Assembly Kits Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit Process Head Kits Process Head Assembly Kit with PTFE Gasket and with 51452864 010 Carbon steel head zinc plated without side vent drain 51452864 012 Carbon steel head zinc plated with side vent drain 51452864 020 Stainless steel head without si
136. EEN THE SMART FIELD COMMUNICATOR CONNECTION POINT AND POWER SUPPLY SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL LINEAR MEASURE INCH nv enor F eevee EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAM MATERIAL PEENE ST3000 SERIES TRANSMITTER LOOP RESISTANCE EQUALS WIRE LIE EET NUN INTR SAFE SYS MODEL G RESISTANCE RECEIVER RESISTANCE THE COPYRIGHT DF THIS DRAWING R JFS seves IS THE PROPERTY DF HONEYWELL THE DRAWING IS SUPPLIED IN CONFIDENCE AND MUST NOT FINISH gt N OTES USED FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN THAT FOR WHICH IT IS SUPPLIED scaLe none usen on 1 cre CADFILE 753607 1 DWG N DO NOT SCALE DRAWING FIELD WIRING POWER FIELD TERMINALS SUPPLY RED m RECEIVER 2 POWER SUPPLY AND RECEIVER LOCATED N NON HAZARDOUS AREA SMART FIELD COMMUNICATOR A CROSS HATCHED AREA IS USABLE OPERATING AREA A MINIMUM OF 250 OHMS OF LOOP RESISTANCE IS NECESSARY TO SUPPORT COMMUNICATION SMART FIELD COMMUNICATOR MAY BE CONNECTED AT ANY POINT IN THE LOOP BETWEEN THE BARRIERS S AND THE ST3000 TRANSMITTER AT WHICH CONNECTIONS ARE ACCESSIBLE THERE MUST BE A MINIMUM SERIES RESISTANCE OF 250 OHMS BETWEEN THE SMART FIELD COMMUNICATOR CONNECTION POINT AND POWER SUPPLY SEE INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 LOOP RESISTANCE EQUALS WIRE RESISTANCE RECEIVER RESISTANCE NOTES CADFILE 753607 3 DWG SIGNAL ST5000 TRANSMITTER SERIES 800 900 SIGNAL GROUND
137. FC electronic problem or a faulty corrective action required and try or dead communication loop again Check communication loop Replace SFC Tlale TET I Either there is too much Check polarity wiring and power JRIEIS L O ivioiLiT resistance in loop open circuit supply There must be 11 volts voltage is too low or both minimum at transmitter to permit operation Check for defective or misapplied capacitive or inductive devices 1 on the loop wiring Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 203 11 6 Interpreting Messages continued Interpretation table continued Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table continued Message Possible Cause What to Do SAV E HL W 1 Hardware mismatch Part of Save Restore function Nothing SFC tried to restore as much of database as possible STJA Tusi Tiny Transmitter is operating as current source Press ouTPuT and cLR keys to tell transmitter to exit output mode TAs INTO I TT T TT TT sent illegal response Try communicating again IR E sIPIo N SEE Tlale T TT TT TTT Transmitter database was Try communicating again i DJAjT A BJA S E incorrect at powerup Verify database configuration
138. Field wiring terminals Ui 30 V li 100 mA Pi 1 2 W Without local analog meter ME Ci 4 2nF Ri 0 Li 0 With local analog meter ME Ci 4 2nF Ri 0 Li 150 pH With local smart digital meter SM 42nF 0 Li 0 The pressure transmitter is an intrinsically safe apparatus that can be installed in potentially explosive atmospheres The power terminals must be connected only to a certified associated intrinsically safe apparatus The electrical parameters U I and P of the associated apparatus connected to the power terminals must not exceed the following values Ui lt 30V li x 100 Pi lt 1 2 W Ambient temperature 50 C to 93 C NOTE 50 C to 93 C is the certification and Operative Limits for the product family Refer to individual Specification Sheets for the standard Rated Condition ambient limits for a particular model that as shown on the data plate and certification nameplate may be less than the certification limits Temperature classifications IS ia 4 20 mA DE Flameproof d 4 up to Ta lt 93 T5 up to Ta lt 93 T5 up to Ta lt 85 T6 up to Ta lt 78 T6 up to Ta lt 78 Enclosure classification IP 66 67 Type 4X Power supply to field wiring terminals Ucc lt 42 V Output Signal 4 20 mA Ambient operating temperature 50 to 93 C NOTE 50 C to 93 C is the certification and Ope
139. Hg Millimeters of Mercury is selected engineering units for digital readout Pounds per Square Inch is selected engineering units for digital readout Transmitter is absolute pressure type Digital readout represents absolute values Stick On Label not shown Selected engineering unit equals one of these units which is available as a stick on label from Honeywell drawing number 30756918 001 Kpa Kilopascals Mpa Megapascals mbar Millibar bar Bar g cm2 Grams per Square Centimeter Kg cm2 Kilograms per Square Centimeter mmH20 Millimeters of Water inHg Inches of Mercury mH2O Meters of Water Typical operation Table 51 summarizes typical Local Smart Meter indications Note that indications other combinations of status messages are possible Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 165 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continued Typical operation indications continued Table 51 Summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications Meter Indication S Meter Indication What It Means 200 ANALOG In H20 CHECK STATUS No power applied Normal display for transmitter in Analog mode with digital readout in inches of water Normal display for transmitter in DE mode and square root output Digital readout is gallons per minute with 1000 multiplier Transmitter in DE mode is in non critical status Di
140. Honeywell ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300 and Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 User s Manual 34 ST 25 14 6 05 Copyright Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2005 by Honeywell Inc February 2005 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles TDC 3000 SFC Smartline and ST 3000 are U S registered trademarks of Honeywell Inc Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Industrial Measurement and Control Honeywell International Inc 2500 W Union Hills Drive Phoenix Arizona 85027 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 About This Publication This manual is intended as a detailed how to reference for installing piping wiring configuring starting up operating maintaining calibrating and servicing Honeywell s family of Release 300 Series 100 and Series 900 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters It is based on using a model STS103 Smart Fiel
141. LYY HLIA SONVOSOIOY NI 38 LSTW NULL T IVLSNE Solouv 51 W 00 vini spaaus NU JSN LON LSNW Snivsvddv 0315100559 Dl 13193NNUJ LNAWdINOA TWALNOI ONLLLLA QNV39 313899 031517 TLAN V ONISN SH3814 ANY 1 ISNIVOV S3IMIN3 31859 IW 000 YWA 5 WS 000 vW 2 s us WAS CISN LON SI LINGNOO TVLIW CIDIY SNOILYTIVLSNI II 5570 II 55079 NJ 2 EA asus Kisu up T erous ager 17 199 Y lqo33 JIH AD 251 lt A AD 20 lt 6 0 9 Sieaus S 0 I Spaaus uondpg 8uj4u8r1 uoN uondg Sulu1u58 1 REPRIS DRIN SY O Wi 39S ANW93ISul443u 006 001 Selves 000 1 38 1 cS J23 DNIQS33NIDN3 LN3WNOUG NDILVOIJILS23 TO oS Rd 6 3 8 ALON 0 11 WS 008VHW2 HhO0SI 1 IW AILIN DOWNY d GC I3IHS 0 11 AT 00 8 Vial 0 ir WS H313W4 L8VAS 19907 B 3 ALAAVS OISNISLLNI HNOGT 1 34 00 VWa3l Jug 19 0 19 AZT x MZT e VuG22 Ay Qy Aviey XOWA 3 SaL JNVelVd ALILNG lt 31UN5 SS3L3WAVelVd ALILNd LNAWdINDS CL 9 SALON 4 10aLNO9 Q3183AND2 N3INNVED SniVavddv 131 12088 0015 0065 a __000815 ALILINS JAWA Ida s 68E60ETS 33130 33 Ud L 8 A J s 3 N ves avon _ Cq 3IHS 8tt2SZ0e S339IA3 dUD 71 21402707 S3L3A4 9U
142. MZT MZT YuGe VuGgg Abidy XOUA XONA lt ALON SelJWAVaVd ALILNd Sae 3L3WAVelVd ALILNd LNAWdINOS 4 9 SALON 105109 C I3183ANUO 8I3I2lSI V8 m NGL LIWSNVAL SNLVAVdd ss 31NI9USSV 0015 0065 aariad s one 31DN 959 or SAU i f 68E60EIS NALIN tT Ia A 6 310 TAVAS NOP 131 825 08 43134 9U IVNV IS 00EVWal WO 00EYWA 3IN 00E VW INSD31NI a eure ie ut 1 SNUILdU 33138 31IDN39 000 WS 31DND m yp oy P S39LA30 007 40 1 21902107 AU epe ia S3OIAdd 40 9 0022402 TE y older ct ims vale yuged gt IS SNOASNISLNI 3114023S 34VS ATIVIISNISLNI Av2b gt 20A 268 ADA cono POR 2 SS3I3HVSVd ALTING NUIIVOUT ASSY O SNOCSYZVH ADS 00 20 20 g get2d0e4 AJJ M E wes NUILVOUT SRQUdsVZVH NUN 0 v2 63 3SV313M 3Lvd NDISIA33 SSI 9 9 3 9 3 9 3 9 9 215 aa 3d 6 8 4 9 S E 2 T L33HS L evev0elS SNIAVaC 37995 LON DG Y DAT 2z evev0Og JIVI 640 Z LHS 00 90 01 31901 9 AJJ 31v3s cr cv0cIS gt lw xn WS O0EVWS WS OOEVWS TSCOW 3138 LAYWS NOILdO 8313W 4LOW4a OOOEWS c DNISIA 3l1VN231 IV S3LUASNVSL O000 1S Ht 4LVNASL lv WS O0EVWS lt 2 1 III 5519 f5 4 3 dn a5 I 55979
143. Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank Continued Procedure continued Table 41 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close block off valve A See Figure 41 for sample piping arrangement 3 Open plug C Allow system to stabilize at head pressure 4 DE READ INGLTIIITITITI Be sure any switches that may trip TIR 1 5 5 0 alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NON VOL No TT TT Confirm that TRIPS are secured c wonRk iN and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 ELEN DP No i PIT ately 6 RUE F IRL 1 T T slay Read present LRV setting 0 2 2 0 2 G RI TT PITI Prompt asks if you want to set LRV SET TTTTSERC TERI E EET to applied pressure 11 IPITI LRVis set to applied head pressure Te 9
144. NNVE CAUBMddv 3197 1 11 G3l1IWa3d SI DNIAVSC SIHL OL NDISIA3B ON 49394 3W y S sus 91 61009 NV 6 00S fusis Gouge SH Z 2 3505 Si Sande sns Eee BENDS 40 SNOILIDd 3189T1ddV IONVTADIIY NI 34 15 NOLLY 1IVLSNE 2 000 vwa 9 says Ws 000 s us A 31933N3D A0 ISN LON 1 SN3INNVH OL G3133NNU3 IN3WdIn93 TD31ND3 WS 000 G 54 8 45 2 1 u 9 AY103ISUI41U s ys s S3DNVHO9 DONIS33NION3 ISHLUN L 0 G S eaus p 0 T Spaaus IN3WOOUG NOILVOIJILSO uon dg 6uiuju8r1 uoN uondg 8ujiu6r1 Dajauag qooisulA4u 006 00T Savas 000ELS 9 3 FLON Bd HMOGT SW N3L134 DD TNS INNOAD CQ 3IHS 5 81 3 WS 008VW3 0 11 WS 3L3W LaWWS 75207 3 1 OISNIMANI Hh0GI 11 Ju2y 19 0 19 3N 00 VI3 AZT d MZT W ae Ade N Age N Sal anvavd ALILN3 a a Sualanvavd ALINI S SALON WAaLNOS L GI3LS3ANUO 3ISeIVg NGL LINSNWS snivavddv Q31VI29USSV 0015 0065 G3IJILN 32 000815 310ND MEC EES OS SS Aldons 68E60EIS NALIN E 8 X 9 3105 dec EN od od Em an siteszoe S30IA30 dDD1 WW 50 7 lqo54 lt o1 3313W 9079 S301430 007 77 JB 19 219029709 WS 00E
145. NPT male e In line 9 16 AMINCO e In line DIN 19213 e Flange adapters and manifolds with 1 2 inch female connections are optional STG9x4 e 2 inch Sanitary Tri Clamp STGxxT e Flush mount in 1 inch weld sleeve with O ring and locking bolt STGxxP Absolute Pressure Process head with 1 2 inch NPT female connection STAX22 x40 e In line inch NPT male e 9 16 AMINCO e DIN 19213 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Small flange 1 2 inch 1 1 and 2 inch STFxxT e 2 3 or 4 inch flange with flush or 2 4 or 6 inch extended diaphragm See Table 14 on high pressure side e DN 50 80 or 100 PN 40 flange with flush or 2 4 or 6 inch extended diaphragm See Table 14 on High Pressure Side Remote Diaphragm Seals See Model Selection Guide for description of available Flanged Threaded Chemical Tee Saddle and Sanitary process connections Reference side has standard differential pressure process head Continued on next page 40 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued Flange descriptions Table 14 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted liquid level transmitters Table 14 Flange Description Transmitter Type Description Flush or Extended Diaphragm 2 inch 150 serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 120 7 mm 4 75 in diameter bolt circle and a
146. NVED 1081309 SnlVavddv 2319190559 G3LJILN32 59 ALON a 5 WO O0EVWA N3AUd lt 2 310 III SS 19 9 43 dnU3D I SSv32 q 2 8 V dnUND I spent JNOISNIALNI 31I8033S 33VS ATIWSISNISLNI Md3LLINSNVML 00015 01 3 NIILVOU lt dslsISSV 19 SNUCSVZVH NOILVY9O1 SNOUCAVYZVH NON vet ET EB TT OT 6 8 n 2 S S m z 10N Od SNIAVAC 37995 SAT T Ev2vO0 IS 37130 9 ada L 30 T LHS CASA 3NUN 3125 Everd2lG Z C3llddns SI 11 HOIHA 304 LWHL NVHL W3HlU 3SDd nd ANY 04 CISN 3 amp LON LSNW ANY 3ON3ILJNUO NI 43174915 SI 9NIAVBOI IHL Ever0elS u 43 9313N32 3J S ATTWOISNIMINI sa apna vo ENAV stil Sa SL SITAS TOM ENS x WONG Dan eee AND Gi3IHNVg ATddAS LY CIANNOAD 0713195 SNULLVOITddV 0075700650001 vs semasa AJHLO X04 CICNSNWOIIS NV ALIWNOANOI 32 A04 CIAINOJA SI IAIM C3ICTSIHS 9 HONE ANSYIN WHO T NVHL SS31 38 1SNW a eoo EZ SS Hlvd ONNOAD HlsV3 40 3ONVISIS3N FHL P Z L SIO0S N34d 300312313 908 Nave t XQ noxae Hlava 37991115 V 01 GALOINNOO 38 1 SAJIAAYE 13101051 ATTVOINVA 1V9 NUN S LN3HdInD3 SIHL SNITIVISNI N3H G3AUTIU4 38 1 ONIAVSO NOILYTIYLSNI SJANLIVANNYW AJAYA JHL ANY 3I3LL339 2313N329 38 1 SN3I
147. P Transmitter s temperature sensor has failed Replace transmitter No TTT TTT IT SFC is operating incorrectly Try communicating again If error still exists replace SFC 1 N P U T Input data seems wrong Could be a process problem but it could also be a meter body or PWA problem Put transmitter in output mode and press sTAT key Diagnostic messages should identify where problem is If no other diagnostic message is given condition is most likely meter body related Check installation and replace meter body if condition persists 5 REIS T ORE 8 On database restore transmitter types do not match Nothing SFC tried to restore as much of database as possible Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 205 11 6 Interpreting Messages continued Interpretation table continued Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table continued Message Possible Cause What to Do sIrTATr UTS PIT Selection is unknown Be sure SFC software is latest UNKNOWN T T T TTT version Press SHIFT and 3 to view SFC software version HT T efr Talofat Transmitter s write protect jumper If authorized move W R jumper on W TIE ECTE is in its read only position PWA
148. P with single ended head use mounting holes in side of meter body In line GP and AP STGxxL and STAxxL use smaller U bolt provided to attach meter body to bracket See figure below Dual head GP and AP use mounting holes in end of process head Example Inline model transmitter mounted to optional angle mounting bracket Inline models Meter Body Smaller U bolt Use bracket for hexagonal meter body bracket supplied If meter body is round discard the bracket NOTE If the meter body is hexagonal you must use the additional Continued on next page 28 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Bracket mounting continued Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket continued 4 Loosen set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn Rotate electronics housing a maximum of 180 degrees in left or right direction from center to the position you require and tighten set screw 13 to 15 Ib in 1 46 to 1 68 N m Example Rotating electronics housing 44 Electronics Housing 180 degrees max Set Screw 180 degrees max E ATTENTION The metric socket head wrench kit supplied with the SFC includes 2 5 3 and 4mm size wrenches You will need the 4mm size wrench for the outside set screw Continued on next page
149. S OF OV MIND C33I2g398 ATddNS LY G3GNNOYXD C 13IHS 6 0 9 sissus 5 5 SNOILVOITdd YSHLO X04 Q3IN3WWDO38 ANY ALIWAOANOD 33 X03 C323I0033 SI ANIM G 3013IHS 6 Bulu1u8I1 uondg 6 7 WHO T NVHL 5537 38 LSAW HlVd GNNOSD JHL 40 39NS1SIS32 8 z 1N3WdIQO3 SIHL NITIYLSNI NIHA YSI 39S ANOIMSUMIUT 006 001 591795 00081S C3071704 38 1 ONIAVAC NOILYTIYLSNI SAIANLIVANNYW SNLVAVddY C31VIOUSSV 4 1 2 OS 3I NHIL93U1 0313155910 SNOGAVZVH 2 NOISIAIG I SSV1O NI G3TIWLSNI AYW SNLYAYddY 319190559 I3IJIL333 YSI 38 1 SNLVAVdd CALVIDOSSy 9 WAUNddV YSI LNOLIA 311IN33d SI ONIAVAC SIHL OL NDISIA32 DN S 3009 70914193713 NVIGVNVO JHL HIIA 3ONVTND2OV NI 38 LSNW NOILYTIYLSNI F A0S2 NYHL 3 DN 31V33N39 3SN LON LSAW SNLYAYddY 31912055 OL 3133NNDU3 LNIWdINOI TOYLNOD DNILLI4 GNV19 31893 131517 TLAN V ONISN 14 ANY LSNG LSNIV Y S3ININ3 318V2 7035 T3SN LON SI LINGNOD 1 GIDIS 33B3H A SNOILYTIYLSNI II 55970 II SSV10 4 2 OD 11 09 539 3sI XOW 20A XoWA NOTLYNIWAS ALILN3 X04 SNOLLONALSNI SIANLIYVANNYW HLIM 3ONVIND2OV NI T31 1V1SNI 38 1 Ss3INNVE T3Sn 38 AVW Sa3INev8 C3LILL339 AILIN3 NU OINI3WAVNVd YSI 153103 6 3 8 310 0 11 NS 00EVWa3l V lt G NDD3D9 13IHS 0 11 W 008VNW2 H 0ST 1 AW DOWNY 3 ALSAAVS SISNIALNI HNOGT 11 34 00 Val 0 WS 233138 LYVWS 17301 0 19 jug v 19 jm
150. ST E 7 1 T sles Call up output for display OUT STF iC K ING L L L 1 1 PUT ou TIP 1 Ter Read 0 output on display for j9j jejeje 1 corresponding empty tank pressure plus head pressure H For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output 8 Close plug C Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 135 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank Continued Procedure continued Table 38 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank Continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 9 Open valve A to begin measuring tank pressure Leave LP side vented to ATTENTION if the URV was atmosphere calculated on the approximate density of the liquid and or tank height the exact URV can be set by filling the tank to the desired full scale level and then setting the URV through the SFC See section 6 7 in this manual for details 10 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to applied tank level pressure If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range
151. STG140 59 STG944 60 STG18L 61 STD120 57 STG170 59 STG974 60 STG90L 61 STD125 57 STG180 59 STG94L 61 STD130 57 STG97L 61 STD170 57 Single Head See STG98L 61 STD904 57 58 AP Models Figure STA12L 61 STD924 57 58 STA122 59 STAQ2L 61 STD930 57 58 STA140 59 STA14L 61 STD974 57 58 STA922 59 STAQ4L 61 STA940 59 e 9 Remote Diaphragm Seal E Models Flange 150 LGP Models GE OL S re Mounted See SIRISD SIRIS STG93P 62 Models STR14A STR17G os 128 63 STR93D STR94G STF132 63 Attention No replacement meter body is STF12F 63 available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models STF13F 63 STF14F 63 STF924 63 STF932 63 STF92F 63 STF93F 63 High Temperature See Models Figure STG14T 64 Ld STF14T 64 gt w Continued on next page 210 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Figure 54 Replacement Parts continued ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference 1 Angle 2 Mounting Bracket Flat Mounting Bracket Table 69 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 30752770 003 Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount 2 30752770 004 Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for models LGP Flush mount STR14G STR17G and STR94G 3 51196557 001 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all m
152. STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page 11 1 Introduction 11 2 Overview 11 3 Clearing the Symbol From SFC Display 11 4 Diagnostic Messages 11 5 Running Status Check 11 6 Interpreting Messages 11 7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard About this section This section identifies diagnostic messages that may appear in the SFC and describes what they mean An interpretation of diagnostic messages is given which suggests possible cause and corrective action for each message Procedures are provided for running a status check and testing the SFC keyboard 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 195 11 2 Overview Diagnostics ATTENTION Troubleshooting tool The SFC and ST 3000 transmitter are constantly running internal diagnostics to monitor the functions and status of the control loop and their communications link When a diagnostic failure is detected a corresponding message is generated for the SFC display See Section 11 4 Diagnostic Messages for details There are additional diagnostics provided by the STIMV IOP for transmitters integrated with the TPS system and any message will appear in the TRANSMITTER STATUS field of the Detail Display in the Universal Station Details about the STIMV IOP diagnostic messages are given in the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration
153. TT 3000 temperature transmitters and MagneW 3000 electromagnetic flowmeters Changing the mode from analog to digital or digital to analog Configuration parameters for Magnew 3000 as well as scratch pad configuration area SFC model differences continued Table 2 If SFC model is STS102 STS103 Same as STS102 plus new multivariable transmitters SCM 3000 Smart Coriolis Flowmeter and SGC 3000 Smart Gas Chromatograph SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitters if SFC software version is 4 2 or greater SMV 3000 with superheated steam algorithm and thermocouple input if SFC software version is 4 4 or greater Release 300 Series 100 and 900 ST 3000 pressure transmitters if SFC software version is 5 0 or greater Two line 16 character per line display Made SAVE and RESTORE functions part of configuration menu instead of dedicated keys Configuration parameters for SCM 3000 and SGC 3000 Configuration parameters for SMV 3000 SMV 3000 configuration parameters for superheated steam algorithm and thermocouple inputs Local Smart Meter configuration parameters ATTENTION The keystroke actions and prompt displays referenced in this manual are for the SFC model STS103 While the SFC model STS103 does have a two line instead of a one line display many of the basic keystrokes and configuration parameter prompts for ST 3000 pressure transmitters are identical to those in t
154. TTENTION The display range of the meter is 19 990 000 If you enter larger values they will not be displayed z o o z o ENTER YES m m I vim 2 gt a alo Enters upper display limit in SFC and calls up lower display limit setting 10 Bil n m m 2 a c r c r o o 1 is Key in 5 as lower display limit for Custom unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode Note that lower limit value is referenced to configured LRV ATTENTION Zero 0 is only valid entry for GPM or GPH unit or CUSTOM unit with transmitter in SQUARE ROOT output mode Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 101 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 11 NON VOL ENTER YES Enters lower display limit in SFC and prompt asks if you want to enter changes in transmitter If you want to enter changes go to Step 12 If you do not want to enter changes press CLR key to exit function 12 NON VOL ENTER YES Downloads changes to transmitter and returns to Configure Meter prompt Press CLR key to return t
155. Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in Display goes blank for a 1 2 second and current settings as upper display value and returns to display readout equal to 50 return to previous display Upper display limit output setting is now complete In this example readout is 9 990 000 CUSTOM unit for 50 display range of 0 to 19 990 000 CUSTOM for transmitter with ATTENTION Eor CUSTOM unit in LINEAR output transmitter with LINEAR output you must set both lower and upper display limits for values Honeywell to take effect If you let either the lower or v v upper display limit time out after 30 seconds the meter discards both newly set values and reverts back to the previously set values If you have not yet set the lower display limit value for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode the meter automatically enters the lower display setting function after it displays previously set value if applicable Go to Table 35 Step 3 If you have already set the lower display limit value this completes the lower and upper display limits setting function for CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode Meter returns to normal operation as shown in example display below If you have just set the upper display limit for Flow unit or CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output mod
156. acters each through the SFC Procedure The procedure in Table 48 outlines the steps for editing a sample message in the scratch pad area This procedure assumes that SFC communications have been established with the transmitter by pressing the ID key Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 A DEP PIT 3jo 1 1 Initiate shift key selection ure FE ppp pe THEE E E ETE SCR PAD gt 5 PIT 3 011 1 Call up first group of 16 characters siETFEFILIELLLI LI 5 11 IO NI 3 2 2 93 2 AP Call up second group of 16 NEXT BIYI Y 2 2 UR E EE RR E d al ul characters 3 M sIefRIATT c H 2 T Move cursor to 6th character H gt BY JOHN 2na Cursor moves one character space to right with each press Use key to move cursor one character space to left with each press Note that cursor keys will automatically toggle between pad 1 and 2 when moving forward or backward through message as applicable 4 NUM Pla o 2 T Enter alpha mode so you can use ALPHA BIY 12 SH FT SFC keyboard to enter alphabetic characters 5 E sIefRIATT c H Pao 2 T Key in E and space to change D 121911151917 name from JOHN to JOE SCR PAD 5 T cju Di eT Pere 1121191181911 6 NUM 5 P AJD 2 Exit alpha mode ALPHA BIYI 2
157. alent before you replace end ATTENTION Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper viewing through end cap window You can rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments 13 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power 14 Verify transmitter s configuration data Restore saved database if applicable 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 181 182 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section 10 Calibration 10 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page 10 1 Introduction 10 2 Overview 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal 10 4 Calibrating Range with SFC 10 5 Resetting Calibration About this section This section provides information about calibrating the transmitter s analog output and measurement range It also covers the procedure for resetting calibration to default values as a quick alternative to measurement range calibration 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 183 10 2 Overview About calibration ATTENTION Test Equipment The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter does not require recalibration at periodic intervals to maintain accuracy If a recalibration is required we recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter removed from the process and located in a controlled environment to get the best accura
158. ange Transmitter Connection Flange Process Pipe 1 2 NPT Connection Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 35 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Remote seal Use the procedure in Table 11 to mount a remote diaphragm seal mounting transmitter model Figure 13 shows a typical installation for a remote diaphragm seal transmitter for reference WARNING Mount the transmitter flanges within the limits stated here for the given fill fluid in the capillary tubes with a tank at one atmosphere IF the fill fluid is THEN mount the flange Silicone DC 200 Oil no greater than 22 feet 6 7 meters below the transmitter Silicone DC 704 Oil no greater than 19 feet 5 8 meters below the transmitter Chlorotrifluorethylene no greater than 11 feet 3 4 meters below the transmitter NOTE The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary head effect should not exceed 9 psi 300 mm Hg absolute Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Step Action 1 Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of capillary tubing 2 If Transmitter Model Then Connect Remote Number is Seal on STR93D or STR12D high pressure HP side of transmitter to lower flange mounting on tank wall for variable head H1 STR13D low pressure LP side of transmitter to lower flange m
159. aste To Waste 21010 Continued on next page 38 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued Piping arrangements Another piping arrangement uses a block off valve and a tee connector in continued the process piping to the transmitter as shown in Figure 15 Figure 15 Typical Piping Arrangement for 2 NPT Process Connection Tank Wall 1 2 NPT Connection Block off Valve Transmitter location Table 12 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the process Table 12 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process Process Suggested Location Explanation Gases Above the gas line The condensate drains away from the transmitter Liquids 1 Below but close to the 1 This minimizes the static head elevation of the process effect of the condensate connection 2 Level with or above the 2 This requires a siphon to process connection protect the transmitter from process steam The siphon retains water as a fill fluid ATTENTION For liquid or steam the piping should slope a minimum of 25 4 mm 1 inch per 305 mm 1 foot Slope the piping down towards the transmitter if the transmitter is below the process connection so the bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid If the transmitter is located above the process connection the piping should rise vertically above the transmitter then slope
160. ay PIS d ope 6 nur Call output for display OUT STF iC wojR K iNe L L L 1 1 PUT foul TIP 1 Terr Read 0 output on display for je9j jejeje corresponding input pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output 7 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to zero and full scale pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 8 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 147 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals Procedure The procedure in Table 45 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid level measurement application Refer to Figure 48 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 48 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter with Remote Seals H2 Fixed Ref Leg LP Side B H i Full Level 1 Variab
161. bly kit carbon steel head model STD110 only 30753908 013 Process head assembly kit st steel head model STD110 only 30753908 014 Process head assembly kit carbon steel DIN head model STD110 only 30753908 015 Process head assembly kit st steel DIN head model STD110 only K1 Pipe plug 2 K2 Vent plug 1 K3 Vent bushing 1 K5 Process head 1 K6 Gasket PTFE process head 1 K11 Gasket PTFE optional flange adapter 1 Continued on next page 216 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit Process Head Kits one head with Viton head gasket 30753908 101 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C head 30753908 102 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C DIN head 30753908 103 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head with side vent drain 30753908 104 Process head assembly kit st steel head with side vent drain 30753908 105 Process head assembly kit Monel head 30753908 109 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head without side vent drain 30753908 110 Process head assembly kit stainless steel head without side vent drain 30753908 111 Process head assembly kit stainless steel DIN head without side vent drain 30753908 112 P
162. bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152 4 mm 6 in 3 inch 150 Ibs serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 152 mm 6 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm 7 1 2 in Flush Mount Gauge STG93P 25 4 mm 1 pipe mount 316L SS standard option General piping guidelines e When measuring fluids containing suspended solids install permanent valves at regular intervals to blow down piping e Blow down all lines on new installations with compressed air or steam and flush them with process fluids where possible before connecting these lines to the transmitter s meter body e Be sure all the valves in the blow down lines are closed tight after the initial blow down procedure and each maintenance procedure after that Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 41 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter continued Installing flange Table 15 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process adapter head Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before you insert it into the adapter may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove while you align the adapter to the process head To deform the gasket submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its recessed mounting groove in the adapter Table 15 Installing Flange Adapter Step Action 1 Insert filter screen if
163. cal Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations eee 26 Figure9 Leveling Absolute Pressure Transmitter n nennen rennen 30 Figure 10 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation eese 33 Figure 11 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation esee 34 Figure 12 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations eee enne 35 Figure 13 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation eese 37 Figure 14 Typical 3 Valve Manifold and Blow Down Piping Arrangement eee 38 Figure 15 Typical Piping Arrangement for 2 NPT Process Connection eene 39 Figure 16 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters 43 Figure 17 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Block eeeseseseeseeeeeenerenen rennen nennen nennen 44 Figure 18 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection nennen ener enne 46 Figure 19 Typical SEC Connections ree Ee aen pretio Yet e De eser Tp Etre a usan 51 Figure 20 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections ccessccsesseeceecseeeceveececeeecesecaeesecaeesecnaeeeeeaeeataes 56 Figure 21 Display With All Indicators Lit 57 Figure 22 Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode o
164. carbon steel bolts 30754419 004 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 018 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with 316 st steel NACE bolts 30754419 020 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapters with 316 st steel NACE bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches Ig flange adapter 4 K11 Not Shown Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2 K12 Not Shown Filter screen 2 30754419 003 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 019 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st steel NACE bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches Ig optional flange adapter 4 K11 Not Shown Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2 Process Head Kits one head with PTFE head gasket 30753908 001 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C head 30753908 002 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C DIN head 30753908 003 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head with side vent drain 30753908 004 Process head assembly kit st steel head with side vent drain 30753908 005 Process head assembly kit Monel head 30753908 009 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head without side vent drain 30753908 010 Process head assembly kit stainless steel head without side vent drain 30753908 011 Process head assembly kit stainless steel DIN head without side vent drain 30753908 012 Process head assem
165. ction 1 Turn OFF transmitter power ATTENTION we recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart 2 Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of transmitter housing We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling 4 the PWA since electrostatic discharges damage certain circuit components 3 e f equipped with a Local Smart Meter carefully turn Smart Meter counterclockwise to remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly e Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from housing e Using the retaining clip unplug flex tape connector and 2 wire power connector from PWA and remove PWA PWA Flex Tape Connector Transmitter Mounting Bracket End Caps Local Smart Connector Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 175 9 4 Replacing PWA continued Procedure continued Table55 Replacing PWA continued Step Action 4 If your transmitter Then has Local Smart Meter go to Step 5 Option does not have Local Smart go to Step 7 Meter Option Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA side without cable connectors Unplug meter cable from connector on PWA Remove screw retainers from other side of mou
166. cy If the transmitter will be operating in the analog mode you must calibrate its output signal before you calibrate the transmitter s measurement range using the SFC While it is not required to calibrate the output signal first for transmitter s operating in the DE mode you can do it by using the SFC to read the output in percent You can also use the SFC to reset the calibration data to default values if it is corrupted until the transmitter can be recalibrated See Table 59 in this section for details If the transmitter is digitally integrated with our TPS system you can initiate range calibration and calibration reset functions through displays at the Universal Station GUS and Allen Bradley PLCs However we still recommend that you do a range calibration using an SFC with the transmitter removed from service and moved to a controlled environment Details about doing a calibration reset through the Universal Station are given in the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration Manual PM12 410 which is part of the TDC 3000X system bookset Depending upon the type of calibration you choose you may need any Required of the following test equipment to accurately calibrate the transmitter e Digital Voltmeter or milliammeter with 0 0296 accuracy or better e SFC Smart Field Communicator e Calibration standard input source with a 0 02 accuracy e 250 ohm resistor with 0 01 tolerance or better 184 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC
167. d Procedure continued Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 3 Open valves and HP block off to make Allow system to stabilize at full static differential pressure zero 0 by applying pressure zero differential same pressure to both sides of meter body 4 DE READ tlale Be sure any switches that may trip T R I PS S EJC UIRIE DI alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NON VOL 1 1 1 11 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER Is Fic wonRk iN and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 LIN DP TA No PIT B n 6 A LIIIN T ovr Initiate shift key selection a iN PlUT 1 PITI s e 1 1 Read applied input pressure OUT SF C WORKING Reading is updated every six PUT seconds N PUT 1 3911 912 3 5 11 1H 2101 13191 7 TT 1 T felt TsIen m Call up output for display TF e rise L LIL PUT T felt ploa Read 0 output on display for 6 je 1 1 J 1 corresponding zero input pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 096 output 8 If SFC and Then milliammeter readings are exactly go to Step 11 zero 4mA are not exactly go to Step 9 zero 4mA
168. d Communicator SFC as the operator interface for the ST 3000 transmitter Be aware that data in this manual overlaps information in the ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide and the Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Operating Guide to minimize cross reference While this manual provides detailed procedures to assist first time users it also includes keystroke summaries for most procedures as a quick reference for experienced users If you will be digitally integrating the ST 3000 transmitter with our TotalPlant Solution TPS system you will need to supplement this information with data in the PM APM Smartline Transmitter Integration Manual which is supplied with the TDC 3000 bookset TPS is the evolution of TDC 3000 This manual does not apply for non Release 300 Series 100 Series 600 Series 100e and non Release 300 Series 900 transmitter models If you have a non Release 300 Series 100 or Series 600 ST 3000 Smart Transmitter refer to the Installation Guide 34 ST 33 28 and User s Manual 34 ST 25 09 supplied with the transmitter for information If you have a non Release 300 Series 900 or Series 100e Smart Transmitter refer to the Installation Guide 34 ST 33 31 and User s Manual 34 ST 25 11 supplied with the transmitter for information Patent Notice This product is covered by one or more of the following U S Patents 4 520 488 4 567 466 4 494 183 4 502 335 4 592 002 4 553 104 4 541 282 4 806 905 4 797 669 4 73
169. d SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 239 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Gas applications continued point in the transmitter meter body and the piping is sloped downward at least one inch per foot Side connected transmitters with vent drains at a lower point in the meter body must be regularly checked to assure condensate removal If the transmitter is located below the process taps not recommended piping must still run downward from the transmitter to the drain point and then up to the process as shown in Figure B 3 Steam or electric heating of the drain point will prevent pipe rupture due to freezing Figure B 3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow Mechanical diaphragm seals Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive yet broadest application of all the methods Similar in principle to the liquid seals diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid carry over into the process fluid This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance checks to assure full and equal liquid seal legs Welded diaphragm seals with special fills permit temperatures from 34 to 600 F 36 to 315 C at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated to assure viscosity of tars and similar high freezing point fluids under the coldest conditions Continued on next page 240 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 B 1 Possible Solution
170. d SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Section 9 Maintenance 9 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Preventive Maintenance Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Replacing PWA Replacing Meter Body About this section This section provides information about preventive maintenance routines cleaning barrier diaphragms and replacing damaged parts 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 169 9 2 Preventive Maintenance Maintenance routines The ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance and schedules routine at regularly scheduled intervals However you should consider carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines on a schedule that is dictated by the characteristics of the process medium being measured and whether blow down facilities or purge systems are being used e Check piping for leaks e Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter e Clean the transmitter s pressure chambers including the barrier diaphragms 170 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 9 3 Background Procedure Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being measured sediment or other foreign particles may collect in the process head cavity chamber and cause faulty measurement In addition the barrier d
171. d gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757148 001 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent Plugs Gaskets 30757148 002 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent Plugs Gaskets 30757149 001 Replacement heads Hastelloy Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757500 001 Replacement heads Monel Kit includes Head with side vents Head gasket Teflon Head gasket Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets K3 30757505 001 Process Head Kit Kit includes 6 Teflon head gaskets 80757100 001 6 Viton head gaskets 30749274 004 and 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets 30679622 501 Optional Flange Adapter and Flange Adapter Gaskets Not Shown 30679622 501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 30749274 502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 30754419 002 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 018 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with 316 st steel NACE bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches Ig flange adapter 4 K11 Not Shown Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2 K12 Not Shown Filter screen 2 30754419 003 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30
172. d prompt contains a cursor you can key in a number or an alphabetic character in that space However to key in an alphabetic character you must first press the NUM ALPHA key to initiate the alphabet selection or alpha mode e Example EIEN ole TAG No aS ppp ESTE do p oy ily Cursor NUM ALPHA LIN pP Alpha Mode e Ifthe displayed prompt includes an equal sign you can make another selection after the equal sign by pressing the MENU ITEN key to call up the next selection Note that you can use the NEXT key to call up the next parameter or the W PREV key to return to the previous parameter e Example p E sit BS Tel masu DE_CONF MENU ITEM p E S T 32 2 21 Ee ps Ep PUS pep e Ifthe displayed prompt contains a question mark you can initiate the action in question by pressing the ENTER key to answer yes or abort it by pressing the cLR key to answer no e Example ien isi NON VOL To initiate setting of LRV to applied pressure press ves CLR To abort setting of LRV to applied pressure press No 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 71 6 3 Entering a Tag Number ATTENTION There is a Configuration Record Sheet provided in Appendix C if you want to record the configuration data for your transmitter
173. de vent drain 51452864 022 Stainless steel head with side vent drain 51452864 030 Hastelloy C head without side vent drain 51452864 032 Hastelloy C head with side vent drain 51452864 040 Monel head without side vent drain 51452864 042 Monel head with side vent drain 51452864 050 Carbon steel head nickel plated without side vent drain 51452864 052 Carbon steel head nickel plated with side vent drain Process Head Assembly Kit with VITON Gasket and with 51452864 110 Carbon steel head zinc plated without side vent drain 51452864 112 Carbon steel head zinc plated with side vent drain 51452864 120 Stainless steel head without side vent drain 51452864 122 Stainless steel head with side vent drain 51452864 130 Hastelloy C head without side vent drain 51452864 132 Hastelloy C head with side vent drain 51452864 140 Monel head without side vent drain 51452864 142 Monel head with side vent drain 51452864 150 Carbon steel head nickel plated without side vent drain 51452864 152 Carbon steel head nickel plated with side vent drain Each Process head Assembly Kit includes Ki o oe eeni Pipe Plug See Note 1 2 saw yayay EE exe EE uywa chela 2 KD e Vent Plug See Note 1 repro ER ERE way 1 MP eai kost esios serors Vent Bushing See Note 1 E E N 1 KS uet Process Head HH 1 cen Reeids Gasket PTFE Process Head MR 1 Ka emer RR Eee Gasket PTFE Flange Adapter 1 NOTE 1 This item is
174. ds IL D A T A N O NIV L IE LIN bP PT LL TTT TT TY Keystroke 2 summary Figure 31 shows keystroke summary for setting LRV and UR V to applied pressures for quick reference Figure 31 Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures NON VOL NON VOL A ENTER ENTER Yes SHIFT Yes 22541 84 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Local zero and span option About local adjustments ATTENTION Procedure ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters are available with optional local zero and span adjustments This option is for applications that do not require an SFC nor digital integration with our TPS system You must apply equivalent zero and span pressures to make the local zero and span adjustments This is similar to setting the LRV and URV to applied pressures using the SFC After making any adjustments to the Smart Meter keep the transmitter powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non volatile memory If power is turned off before 30 seconds the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter power is restored the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings The procedure in Table 27 shows the steps for setting the range values to applied pressures using local zero and span adjus
175. dure continued Figure 52 Typical Calibration Hookup ST 3000 Low Pressure Head DVM See NOTES Dead Weight Tester See NOTES NOTES The digital voltmeter must have a 0 02 accuracy or better The calibration standard input source must have a 0 02 accuracy The 250 ohm resistor must have a 0 01 tolerance or better 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 191 10 5 Background Resetting Calibration You can erase incorrect calibration data by resetting the data to default values through the SFC The default values return the transmitter calibration to the original factory characterization values Characterization calculates a mathematical model of the performance of the transmitter s sensors and then stores that data in the transmitter s memory Note that this is not the final calibration which is done at the end of the process against the ordered range While resetting the calibration will return the transmitter to a close approximation of the previous calibration using its stored characterization data the accuracy of the reset transmitter will be lower than the specified final calibrated accuracy The calibration is not exact since the transmitter mounting angle may be different than the factory mounting angle This means that the transmi
176. e 990 f ANALOG hA Press amp v A ee ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default unit of percent during this operation If the error code appears on the display you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span adjustments If the error code Er4 appears you are trying to set a SPAN value that is outside acceptable limits for your transmitter Readjust applied pressure to be within acceptable range limits and repeat this procedure b Press Increase button once to complete this function ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1 2 second and then returns reading 100 Honeywell y var Y Y ea l SY UPPER 100 e 100 0 2 ANALOG o Display goes blank for 1 2 second and returns with 100 reading Press once v ee c Check that milliammeter reading equals 20 mA and release SPAN button ATTENTION it miliammeter reading doesn t change be sure you are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local adjustments The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set engineering units after you release the SPAN button Continued on next page 90 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Continued Procedure continued Table27 Setting Ran
177. e this completes the limit setting function Meter returns to normal operation as shown in example display below Continued on next page 120 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Button Pushing Figure 36 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to Summary select the engineering units Figure 36 Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering Units v Select Unit EU0 EU8 gom EU1 inH O EU9 Kgom EU2 mmHg EUA mmH O EU3 PSI EUB inHg EU4 KPa EUC mH O EU5 MPa E EU6 mbar EUD GPM B EUE GPH E bar EUF Custom Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 121 6 12 Button Pushing Summary Figure 37 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued SQUARE ROOT Mode LINEAR Mode Set Lower Set Upper Range Value Range Value Upper Value Y Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display Limits Figure 37 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to set the lower and upper display limits Yes Ws 1 digit to BLANK A Set 1 digit to 1 If display limit was previously set KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value flashes in display Note that lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 00 for units n SQUARE ROOT mode Y
178. e 14 7 psia the temperature of the steam is also increased For example if we have steam at 30 pounds per square inch gage psig the steam temperature is 274 F 134 C Continued on next page 248 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Superheated steam considerations continued On industrial flow and pressure measurement applications we may be required to use steam to heat the impulse piping to the flow or pressure transmitter as well as the transmitter itself For these applications we must verify the temperature of the heating steam used As an example assume that steam at 100 psig saturated 338 F 170 C 15 to be reduced to 30 psig pressure for the heating system Too frequently it is assumed that this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274 F 134 C the temperature of saturated steam at 30 psig Wrong A reduction of the steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam temperature In our example we were talking about saturated steam in the main header from the boiler But modern industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste heat go up the stack After reaching the boiling point in the drum the steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas exit extracting additional heat energy and being raised to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure This is superheat and dep
179. e 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 A 1 Table Ill Options Reference continued Codes and descriptions continued If Code 15 Then transmitter option is FM approval body certification for Explosionproof Flameproof Class l Division 1 Groups A B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class Il 1 Division 1 Groups F G Non Incendive Class Division 2 Groups A B C D Intrinsically Safe Class 1 Il Ill Division 1 Groups A B C D E F G FM approval body certification for ntrinsically Safe Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups A B C D E F G CSA approval body certification for Explosionproof Class I Division 1 Groups B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class Il 1 Division 1 Groups F G Non Incendive Class Division 2 Groups A B C D Intrinsically Safe Class Il IIl Division 1 Groups A B C D E F G CSA approval body certification for intrinsically Safe Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups A B C D E F G LCIE approval body certification for Flame Proof CENELEC EEx d IIC T6 intrinsically Safe CENELEC EEx ia IIC T5 3D LCIE approval body certification for Flame Proof CENELEC EEx d IIC T6 Zone 2 Europe certification for Self Declared per 94 4 EC ATEX4 ExII 3 GD T6 X Ui x 42V x Zone 2 40 lt Ta x 93 IP66 67 3S Approval body certification for intrinsically Safe CENELEC EEx IIC T5 4G or 4H SA approval body certification for Intrin
180. e tried to invoke a Local Smart Meter set function with the transmitter s Write Protect jumper in its Read Only position You cannot make changes in the Local Smart Meter settings when the transmitter s configuration is write protected Meter transmitter e Cycling transmitter power OFF ON will have no affect on meter een configuration The meter digital readout will be in the previously set engineering units and applicable upper and lower display limits will be intact when transmitter power is restored See ATTENTION in Section 6 8 when setting range values and configuring the meter display e Ifyou switch the transmitter mode from Analog to DE the ANALOG indicator on the meter will go out If you switch from DE to Analog mode the ANALOG indicator will light e Ifyou reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from SQUARE ROOT to LINEAR the meter s digital readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent and the FLOW indicator will go out when the change is downloaded to the transmitter Likewise if you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from LINEAR to SQUARE ROOT the meter s digital readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of percent and the FLOW indicator will light when the change is downloaded to the transmitter In either case you must reconfigure the transmitter as outlined in Section 6 11 or 6 12 of this manual 168 ST 3000 Release 300 an
181. e values shown in displays are for example purposes only Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access IF you want to view THEN use these keystrokes the present input pressure A T p P elt er INPUT J PUT S r C WERK Netti iN Pur 1 Pl BERGER pop gg e s e the present transmitter INPUT output in percent which is 6 updated every six seconds PUT Is F c K I NG UTP 1 PT 1651714 T pup Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 153 8 2 Accessing Operation Data continued Procedure continued Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access continued IF you want to view THEN use these keystrokes the span which is the URV minus the LRV URL SPAN SPAN 1 PT gna 29g jeje 2 Upper Range Limit of the transmitter SHIFT Bib URL SPAN B L iN pP PT L EJ T3 Ts pepe pede the status of transmitter operation at the present time F S DIR STAT ER 3 111 aperti 141221 jHj2joj 3jejF T 3 1 1 2 sira rus 5 ic injet iiiI smau Pr 5 ciH Eck the present failsafe output direction for the transmitter SHIFT ELAN pe alii IRE Alp iY TT ET TT TT EINE pp 3 ort t
182. ead 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches Ig flange adapter 4 K4 Nut hex metric M12 process heads 4 K8 Bolt hex head metric M12 90mm lg process heads 4 30753785 001 St steel vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753787 001 Monel vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753786 001 Hastelloy C vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753788 003T Process head gasket kit PTFE material 30753788 004T Process head gasket kit for Viton material K6 Head gasket For gasket only 30756445 501 PTFE quantity 12 or 6 30749274 501 6 Viton head O rings and 6 Vition flange adapter O rings K7 O ring 3 K9 Not Shown Gasket flange adapter for gasket only 30679622 501 6 Teflon or 6 30749274 002 6 Viton Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 215 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit Optional Flange Adapter Kits two heads Not Shown 30754419 002 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with
183. ecause it could not process one or more commands Check configuration and try again Continued on next page X ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 11 6 Interpreting Messages continued Interpretation table continued Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table continued Message Possible Cause What to Do tlale INT TT TTT I No response from transmitter Try communicating again Nlo X M T R Could be transmitter or loop failure Press ID key and do any corrective action required and try again Check that transmitter s loop integrity has been maintained that SFC is connected properly and that loop resistance is at least 250 O sm ATu Pr ojan see SFC s CPU is misconfigured Replace SFC slav E IREST oRE mM JS M A T C H database restore options do match Nothing SFC tried to restore as much of database as possible slav E REST oRE RIE SITIO RE Irlaliit EDDi Database restore function failed Check transmitter and try again 5 r A riu s P T 5 Meter body temperature is too high Accuracy and life span may decrease if it remains high Take steps to insulate meter body from temperature source sA Tusi Pr 5 IT IE M
184. ed What to configure continued Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters continued Configuration Data Setting or Selection The following parameters are for transmitters in DE mode of operation only Mode of Output Signal Indication Any one of these selections based on control system information needs Single Range Sends the PV value corresponding to the transmitter s working range PVw to the control system for display For systems using STDC card or STIMV IOP module also called STIM Smart Transmitter Interface Module Dual Range STDC Sends the PV values corresponding to the transmitter s full range PVt and working range PVw measurements to the control system for display For systems using STDC card only Single Rng W SV Sends PV value corresponding to the transmitter s working range PVw and temperature value from the transmitter s sensor to the control system for display For systems using STDC card or STIMV IOP module Message Format Choose one of these broadcast types for data transmission to the digital control system Note that DB in following selection prompt stands for database w oDB 4 Byte Byte 1 is output signal mode Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value 1 2 3 FLAG pv pv w DB 6 Byte Byte 1 is output signal mode Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value Byte 5 is data type identifier LRV URV span etc Byte 6 is data being sent 1 2 3 4 5 6 FLaG
185. een received 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual xiii Section 1 Overview First Time Users Only 1 1 Introduction Section contents This section includes these topics Section See Page Introduction ST 3000 Transmitters Smart Field Communicator Transmitter SFC Order Local Smart Meter Options About this section This section is intended for users who have never worked with our ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and its companion operator interface device the hand held Smart Field Communicator SFC before It provides some general information to acquaint you with the ST 3000 transmitter and the SFC Honeywell also offers the SCT 3000 Smartline Configuration Toolkit that runs on a variety of Personal Computer PC platforms using MS DOS 5 0 or higher and Windows 3 1 or higher It is a bundled Microsoft Windows software and PC interface hardware solution that allows quick error free configuration of Honeywell Smartline field instruments Some SCT 3000 features include e Preconfigured templates that simplify configuration and allow rapid development of configuration databases e Context sensitive help and an on line user manual e Extensive menus and prompts that minimize the need for prior training or experience e The ability to load previously configured databases at time of installation e Automatic verification of device identification and database configuration menus and prompts f
186. eesceeseessceseceecesecsecseecaeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeereeseees 39 Process CONnNECHONS 34 odo eae ees ata ind utansa has M onere to 40 Flange Description nineteenth e 41 Installing Flange Adapter sce Rte e Re ated ood ORT Buea eh kee 42 Wiring the Transmitter aaa mansn ote RTT ECC EG EL RE UR 45 Starting Communications with 52 Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software 1 5 55 Changing Mode of Opetatt n y t ee kee es aa ee uds 58 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters essere 64 Entering Tag Number eee etae rec P RR PR ELE t e P Re E ER de dte 72 Selecting Output Conformity au Goo n RUD E ee BRE E DE aa 74 Adjusting Damping ise ee e eie eie eie E I ARE tees 77 Pre Programmed Engineering Units for Selection sse 79 Keying in ERV and tee oin deis 81 Setting LRV and to Applied nnne 83 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments sse 85 Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication esee 92 Selecting Message Format aeneo ae e e Ge REEL e ER QE Ue QR ENTRE UE De ne sss 95 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC 98 Smart Meter Pushbutton
187. election so you can select a range Press and hold t amp E o that is just larger than the range to be scroll backward scroll forward set for best display precision Hold through ssiectons through selections respective key to scroll forward or 199 9 backward through the selections 1999 19 99K Repeat this action until desired selection is on 199 9K The K multiplier display 1999K indicator appears M below the digital 19990K reading on the display Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower Readout goes blank except for first active digit value setting which will be 0 unless lower value was set before Honeywell Continued on next page 112 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons Continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 Step 5 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display continued Action Press Increase button to select the next available digit value or Decrease button to select the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired value is on display Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in first digit and activate next active digit Readout now displays next active digit which will be zero unless lower value was set before Press Increase button to select the next available digit value or Decrease button to select the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired val
188. en valve D to begin measuring process line pressure 10 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to applied line pressure If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 11 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 133 7 6 Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank Procedure The procedure in Table 41 outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter in a liquid level measurement application for a vented tank with a dry reference leg Refer to Figure 41 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 41 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank Valve A d Plug C 4 To HP connection on meter body Tap location at the minimum level to be measured Differential Pressure Transmitter For the procedure in Table 41 we are assuming that the tank is empty and the piping arrangement includes a block off valve Continued on next page 134 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC
189. ending on boiler design it may amount to 50 to 300 F 10 to 149 C above the saturated steam temperature It also permits packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission from the process Thus in the typical application the problem of steam heating is compounded by the additional superheat in the main header Specifically when steam is reduced in pressure it retains about the same latent heat or the same Btu s pound at the reduced pressure Therefore in our example steam at 100 psig and 338 F 170 C when reduced to 30 psig steam will have a temperature of 306 F 152 C or a loss of only 32 F 18 This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater This device mixes cold water with the superheated steam to reduce its temperature by removing Btu s per pound of water steam It is also possible to use temperature controlled steam traps which actually allow the steam to condense to water and therefore reduce its temperature to a pre set value Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 249 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Superheated steam considerations continued Table B 2 lists the various values of steam pressure saturated steam temperatures at these pressures degrees of superheat added to the saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it 15 reduced to 30 psig steam Table B 2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Te
190. ents in circumstances that require higher pressure capabilities Details of pressure ranges for these new models are specified in Additions and Changes to the Manual below 1 of 4 34 ST 99 13 Addendum 10 04 Additions to the The additions to User Manual 34 ST 25 14 that relate to the new Gauge User Manual Pressure transmitter models are given in Table 1 of this addendum Use the information in Table 1 to reference and annotate your User Manual Table 1 Additions to the User Manual Page in User Description of Change Manual 20 3 3 Considerations for ST In the left column of Table 5 under the heading 3000 Transmitter Gauge Pressure add the information as say indicated by the highlights in Exhibit A below Temperature Limits Note Ranges for Ambient Temperature and Table 5 Operating Process Interface Temperature are the same as Temperature Limits for other models in each series Transmitters with Silicone Fluid Fill Fluids 3 3 Considerations for ST In the row of Table 6 titled Gauge Pressure add 3000 Transmitter the information as highlighted in Exhibit B below Pressure Ratings Table 6 Transmitter Overpressure Ratings 12 1 Replacement Parts At the right of Figure 53 under LGP Models references to Figure 61 have been added for Figure 53 Major ST3000 ST 3000 Transmitters STG19L and STG99L Smart Transmiter Parts Reference NOTE The use of Figure 61 and corresponding Table 76 i
191. er Description Quantity No Per Unit K3 Gasket Teflon for gasket only 30756445 502 narrow profile L P or 6 30756445 503 STG180 Gasket Viton for gasket only 30756445 504 narrow profile L P or 6 30756445 505 STG180 30756445 509 Gasket Graphite for replacement on existing STG A X22 X40 Transmitter 6 with Graphite Gasket only 30753792 001 Bolts amp nuts kit all models narrow profile carbon steel Contains K1 Nut hex metric M8 carbon steel 4 K4 Bolt hex head metric M8 50 mm long 4 30753793 002 A286 SS NACE Bolts amp 304 SS NACE nuts kit all models narrow profile Contains K1 Nut hex 5 16 304 stainless steel 4 K4 Bolt hex head 5 16 18 4 30753793 003 Process Head Bolting 316 SS Non NACE Kit Includes Process Head Bolts and Nuts Contains K1 5 16 18 UNC 316 SS Non NACE Heavy Hex Nuts 4 K4 5 16 18 UNC 316 SS Non NACE Hex Cap Screw 4 Table 74 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body Material Fitting Size Models STA122 STA140 STG140 STG170 STG180 STA922 STA940 Carbon steel Series 100 9 16 18UNF 2B 30755124 001 Stainless steel Series 100 9 16 18UNF 2B 30755124 002 Carbon steel 1 2 in NPT 30755124 005 Stainless steel 1 2 in NPT 30755124 006 Monel 1 2 in NPT 30755124 008 Hastelloy C 1 2 in NPT 30755124 007 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 221
192. er instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify loop pressure type transmitter calibration connect a precision milliammeter or a voltmeter across a 250 ohm resistor in loop to compare readings 2 DE READ T T TT T TITI Be sure any switches that may trip T R I PS SEC UREJD alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 NON VOL Njo 1T T T 1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER IsiFici and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 LIN DP TA No Terr 1319111 4 INPUT Pity 0 Display shows current transmitter mo s Fel WORKING output level and it will update every PUT six seconds Be sure to time your ou r P 1 Pelr 3 0 1 1 next key press with an updated ds j IS display 5 SW EN T Pity Key in 30 for desired output signal LT T Tat tt TISETT TTL TL levelof8 8mA 22V mE olu TP fat jonaa Ti Continued on next page 126 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 3 Running Analog Output Check continued Procedure continued Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant Current Source Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 6 NON VOL Output signal is set a
193. er is equipped with a local smart meter you must reconfigure the smart meter as described in Section 6 11 or 6 12 of this manual whenever you change the transmitter s output conformity Table 22 Selecting Output Conformity Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 B TT Isit fel TT Prompt asks if you want to access j configuration parameter called conformity if you want to access it go to Step 2 If you do not want to access it press CLR key to exit function or NEXT key to call up next configuration parameter 2 NON VOL IcToINTFIOTRIMH TIVE T T T T T Present output conformity is linear POP es OR IcloINIFlofRIM i tly T T T Present output conformity is square SiQ U ARE Root I root 3 DE CON TTIVL T T T T T ied output conformity to square root OR ir Y I T T Change output conformity to linear 4 NON VOL IcToINIFIOIRIMHTTIVL T T T T T Conformity change is entered in 251 D ND 56 SFC ic oiN FjoIR M TIY Prompt asks if you want to O WN jcjH A N G E download change to transmitter If you want to download change go to Step 5 If you do not want to download change press CLR key to return to initial prompt in Step 1 5 NON VOL IcToINIFIOTRIMHTTIVL T T T T T Message exchange is working ENTER 119
194. er signal as not a number and initiates its own configured failsafe action for the control system The STDC card initiates the failsafe mode configured through the transmitter when either signal is generated The failsafe direction display that you can access through the SFC only shows the state of the failsafe jumper in the transmitter as it correlates to analog transmitter operation The failsafe action of the digital control system may be configured to operate differently than indicated by the state of the jumper in the transmitter The procedure in Table 47 outlines the steps for cutting the failsafe direction jumper on the transmitter s PWA Figure 49 shows the location of the failsafe direction jumper on the PWA of Release 300 transmitters The nature of the integrated circuitry used in the transmitter s PWA makes it susceptible to damage by stray static discharges when it is removed from the transmitter Follow these tips to minimize chances of static electricity damage when handling the PWA e Never touch terminals connectors component leads or circuits when handling the PWA e When removing or installing the PWA hold it by its edges or bracket section only If you must touch the PWA circuits be sure you are grounded by staying in contact with a grounded surface or wearing a grounded wrist strap e As soon as the PWA is removed from the transmitter put it in an electrically conductive bag or wrap it in alumi
195. es 6 Teflon head gaskets 30757100 001 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets 30679622 001 6 Viton head gaskets 30749274 004 Optional Flange Adapter Not Shown K4 30679622 501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 6 30749274 502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 6 222 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 223 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 61 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body 4 1 Round Body Hexagonal Body Table 76 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 61 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate plus R300 Series 100 replacement meter body LGP and LAP model 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate plus R300 Series 900 replacement meter body LGP and LAP model Continued on next page 224 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 62 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body Table 77 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 62 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body Flush Mount model 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 30756445 508 Gasket Kit 0 rings 51204496 001 316L SS Mou
196. es within 19 99 to 1 100th of a unit Digital readout represents output in percent of span This is the default engineering units selection FLOW Transmitter is configured for Square Root output conformity OUTPUT MODE Transmitter is in its output mode and it is not sending a real PV signal CHECK STATUS Transmitter in DE mode is broadcasting a critical status or transmitter in Analog mode has an output that is less than 2 0 or greater than 106 Use the SFC to check transmitter s status Continued on next page 164 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continued Display description continued Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51 continued Display Indicator What It Means When Lit KNOWN VALUE The Upper Value or Lower Value being displayed has previously been configured to the value shown ANALOG Transmitter is in its Analog mode When indicator is OFF transmitter is in its DE mode Inches of Water is selected engineering units for digital readout Multiplies digital reading by 1 000 Turns on automatically when reading exceeds 1999 Gallons per hour is selected engineering units for digital readout Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this selection Gallons per minute is selected engineering units for digital readout Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this selection mm
197. etherlands Manufacturing Honeywell Industrial Solutions Locations Industrial Solutions 2500 West Union Hills Drive Phoenix Arizona 85027 USA The authorized signatory to this declaration on behalf of the manufacturer and the Responsible Person is identified below Honeywell International Inc D lt Industrial Measurement amp Control Frederick M Kent 1100 Virginia Drive Standards amp Approvals Engineer Fort Washington PA 19034 USA ATEX Authorized Person Issue Date 18 August 2002 6 04 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 7 of 10 ST3000 R300 Pressure Transmitters LCIE 02 ATEX6101X__ Ex Il 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 to T4 ST HC 3S 4 20 mA HART LCIE 03 ATEX 6175X Ex l 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 to T4 ST HC 3S Foundation TM Fieldbus Sao 900 Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter lll Fstaado 900 Gauge and Absolute Pressure Stem 900 Differential 900 Differential STD974 9 Differential 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmiter SrFoo 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmiter SrEoor 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level STe 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter s High Pressure SrGosp 900 Flush Mount Gauge Pressure 9 Gau
198. evel Measurement Pressurized Tank continued Procedure continued Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close block off valves A and B See Figure 42 for sample piping arrangement 3 Open plugs C and D Allow system to stabilize at head pressure 4 DEED tlale T T TT TT TI Be sure any switches that may trip TIR IPS S EJC UIRIE DI alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NON VOL TA Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER s Fc wonRk iN G and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 IILI eer 6 LIR RE T P T Read present LRV setting 0 2 0 2 G RI IPT een Prompt asks if you want to set LRV udi TI Sie yr 49 apples pressure ILiRIVI 1 IPIT 131 1 1 LRV is set to applied head pressure ENTER 1 5 32 H 2 O _ 3 9 F H times density of liquid in
199. f Operation eese 59 Figure 23 Summary of Configuration Process essent eene 61 Figure 24 SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories essent nennen rennen rennen rennes 62 Figure25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration esee 67 Figure 26 Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag Number essent 73 Figure 27 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity essere ener 75 Figure 28 Square Root Dropout Points l ananassa rennen entren e retener innen e tette nennen 76 Figure 29 Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Time 78 Figure 30 Keystroke Summary for Keying LRV and rennen 82 Figure31 Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and to Applied Pressures 84 Figure 32 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments 91 Figure 33 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication sss 94 Figure 34 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format sssssseeeeee eene 96 Figure 35 Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart Meter n nnnnsnssssassss 103 Figure 36 Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering Units sseeeeeeee ee 121 Figure 37 Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display Limits
200. f this addendum Use the information in Table 1 to reference and annotate your User Manual Table 1 Additions Changes to the User Manual Page in User Description of Change Manual 21 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 The Maximum Working Pressure Rating and the Transmitter Overpressure Rating has been enhanced for all models included in this addendum except for the Table 6 Transmitter draft range transmitter Overpressure Ratings For more information refer to Table 5 in this Addendum 4 3 Piping ST3000 Transmitter In Step 5 do not use the torque specifications given Table 15 Installing Flange Instead torque Flange Adapter bolts evenly to Adapter 47 5 Nem 2 4 Nem 35 Lb Ft 1 8 Lb Ft 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning In Step 8 do not use specifications for head bolt Barrier Diaphragms torque given in Table 54 Table 54 Process Head Bolt Instead torque head bolts nuts to the specifications Torque Ratings given in Table 2 of this addendum 179 180 9 5 Replacing Meter Body In Step 9 the reference to Table 48 for applying torque to head bolts nuts should be as given in ds 56 Replacing Meter Body Table 2 of this addendum ny 214 217 12 1 Replacement Parts Figure 57 illustrates the replacement parts available for the previous design of meter body and process Figure 57 and Table 71 heads and Table 71 provides part numbers and descriptions for the parts called out in Figure 57 For the newly designed meter bod
201. f this equipment in Zone 2 hazardous areas must comply with VDE specification 0165 IEC 60079 14 EN 50021 and or valid national standards for installation and operation 2 Before commissioning this equipment it must be verified that the power supply voltage cannot exceed the 42 Vdc maximum for 4 20 mA analog DE and HART equipment and 24 Vdc for Fieldbus equipment The electronic assemblies in these units are non repairable items and if faulty must be replaced The electrical power supply must be switched off before any replacement and during any time that the wiring terminations are being connected or disconnected The technical data supplied by the manufacturer must be adhered to Specifications for Use in Zone 2 4 20 mA DE HART 11 42 Fieldbus Supply Voltage 10 24 Supply Current 23 mA 260 mA 50 to 93 T6 at Ta lt 78 C T5 at Ta lt 93 C Ambient temperature limits Temperature Classification Manufacturing Location Honeywell Process Solutions 2500 West Union Hills Drive Phoenix Arizona 85027 USA lt lt Honeywell International Inc Frederick M Kent amp Control Standards amp Approvals Engineer gina Drive ATEX Authorized Person Fort Washington PA 19034 USA Issue Date 25 June 2004 6 04 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 9 of 10 ST3000 R300 Pressure Transmitters
202. ferential Pressure Transmitter STD974 900 Differential Pressure Transmitter STF904 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF924 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF92F 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF932 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STF93F 900 Flange Mounted Liquid Level Transmitter STG19L 900 High Pressure Gauge Transmitter STG93P 900 Flush Mount Gage Pressure Transmitter STG944 900 Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter STG94L 900 In Line Gage Pressure Transmitter STG974 900 Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmitter STG97L 900 In Line Gauge Pressure Transmitter STG98L 900 In Line Gauge Pressure Transmitter STG99L 900 High Pressure Gauge Pressure Transmitter STR93D 900 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter STR94G 900 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmitter 10 of 10 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 6 04 Honeywell Industrial Measurement and Control Honeywell Inc 2500 W Union Hill Drive Phoenix Arizona 85027
203. for quick reference Figure 35 Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart Meter NON VOL ENTER YES Custom GPM or GPH unit only s NON VOL ENTER YES Meter Not Hi Limit Supported NON VOL ox Number Lo Limit ENTER YES NON VOL DECONF VES I MENU Y ITEM NON VOL NON VOL ENTER YES 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 103 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons Background The local smart meter can be set to show the PV out in engineering units that are appropriate for your process application You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and lower display limit settings for the local smart meter s digital readout using buttons on the face of the meter Using the Smart Follow these guidelines when configuring the local smart meter Melar e Ifyou initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed on the local smart meter the local smart meter will respond to the command it receives last In other words the last command wins e In most cases you can press and release a button for one shot operation or press and hold a button for continuous 1 2 second repetitive operation e Active setup field will begin to flash at one second rate if next action is not initiated within one second And if no action is taken within 30 seconds the setup function will time out and the meter wi
204. formity The lower display value for transmitters configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity is fixed at zero 0 00 and cannot If lower limit display value was previously set KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value flashes in display Honeywell v v Previously set value flashes in display and indicator lights be changed Press LOWER VALUE button again within 5 seconds Otherwise meter exits limit setting function Honeywell v 19 99 vV A ee ATTENTION The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the display limits This selection does not affect the normal operation of the meter During normal operation the display is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 111 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase button to call up next Magnitude range selections available magnitude range selection or Decrease button to call up previous magnitude range selection Honeywell NOTE This action enables the multiplier K for indicating larger ranges and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or right depending on which button is pushed The display shows largest positive number for given range s
205. g and for the Overpressure Rating have been enhanced in all models except the draft range transmitter A summary of specifications is given in Table 5 The new versions which will continue as Models STD110 STD120 STD125 STD130 STD170 STD924 and STD930 differ only in the physical size and form of the meter body process head and associated components With exceptions noted in this addendum information given in User s Manual 34 ST 25 14 applies also to this newer design Installation operation maintenance calibration and troubleshooting tasks remain virtually the same as for the previous version Differences appear primarily in torque specifications when replacing meter bodies and in part numbering and part recognition when replacing components or assemblies This addendum provides details for parts replacement that span a variety of applications of the Models STD110 STD120 STD125 STD130 STD170 STD924 and STD930 For Series 100 Models ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Series 100 Differential Pressure Models Specification and Model Selection Guide 34 ST 03 60 For Series 900 Models ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Series 900 Differential Pressure Models Specification and Model Selection Guide 34 ST 03 65 34 ST 99 22 Addendum to 33 ST 25 14 1 of 8 Additions to the The additions and changes to User Manual 34 ST 25 14 that relate to the newly User Manual designed meter body and process heads are given in Table 1 o
206. g loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close block off valve See Figure 43 or 44 for sample piping arrangement 3 Remove plug from Tee connector to Allow system to stabilize at static vent it to atmosphere if applicable pressure 4 DE READ mals 0000 Be sure any switches that may trip T R 1 Pls SECURED alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 5 NON VOL tiale J J ITT 1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER 5 wok Ne 11 and EL with es sample transmitter LIN TA No PIT B n 6 A olur 1 T felt plona Initiate shift key selection ore IN PUT 11 PT spots ay Bis SFE WORKING T urnan input pressure which PUT should be zero PUNT PUT 1 IPT 389111 19099472 Pisi 7 INPUT Call output for display OUT STF iC K ING L L L 1 1 ell Tale Read 0 output on display for B S corresponding input pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA 0 output Continued on next page 142 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or
207. gases or vapors are present but normally confined within closed containers or systems from which they can escape only under abnormal or fault conditions Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be thrown into suspension Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 253 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations continued Examples Given the criteria above the following examples are made A Class III Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or material processing combustible flyings are handled manufactured or used A Class III Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled Groups Flammable gases vapors and ignitable dusts fibers and flyings are classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most easily ignitable mixture within air Group classifications are as follows Class I Description of Atmosphere Group A Atmospheres containing acetylene Atmospheres containing hydrogen fuel and combustible process gases containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by volume or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard C Atmospheres such as ethyl ether ethylene or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as acetone ammonia benzene butane cyclopropane ethanol gasoline hexane methanol methane natural gas naphtha propane or gases or
208. ge Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 10 Wait 30 seconds so that changes have been copied to the transmitter s non volatile memory 11 Remove applied pressure and turn OFF transmitter power 12 Replace end cap on PWA side of electronics housing and tighten lock 13 Remove milliammeter from TEST terminals and replace end cap and tighten lock 14 Turn ON transmitter power and check Local Smart Meter reading if applicable Figure 32 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments ST 3000 Field Terminals Milliammeter STR3015 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 91 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only DE configuration You must configure these additional parameters for a transmitter in the parameters DE mode of operation e Mode of Output Signal Indication e Message Format This section and the next section cover how to configure these parameters individually However once you enter the DE configuration function you can access all DE configuration parameters serially without exiting the function Just use the A NEXT PREV keys to step through the parameter selections Background You can select the output signal mode for digital transmission to be one of these three modes as described in Table 20 e Single Range e Dual Range STDC e Si
209. ge and Absolute Pressure 9 In Line Gauge Pressure Transmiter 900 Gauge and Absolute Pressure Transmiter j steer s Gauge Pressure rcs 900 Gauge Sos s High Pressure Gauge Transmitter STRe D 000 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmiter STR94G 900 Remote Diaphragm Seal Pressure Transmiter 8 of 10 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 6 04 51452622 Revision C Certificate of Manufacturer EExnAliC This certificate applies following equipment ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitters Series 100 and 900 Release 100 and 900 4 20 mA DE HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus per attached list This equipment has no arcing or sparking parts and no ignition capable hot surfaces and therefore conforms to Clause 6 3 1 3 of VDE 0165 2 91 IEC 60079 14 and EN 50021 for operation in Zone 2 hazardous areas providing that the following conditions are observed The equipment contains no intrinsically safe or energy limiting components The listed equipment are 2 wire devices that receive their power and signal carrier from the same 4 20 mA signal current or Fieldbus supply In normal operation the maximum current supply is 23 mA for lt 4 20 mA analog DE or HART and lt 260 mA for Fieldbus Conditions for the application of the above equipment in Zone 2 hazardous areas 1 The installation o
210. he model STS102 If you will be using a model STS102 SFC you must refer to the SFC Smart Field Communicator Operating Guide 34 ST 11 10 for keystroke details But be aware that transmitter functions will be limited to only those that are supported by the Model STS102 SFC 10 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 1 4 Transmitter SFC Order Order components Figure 5 shows the components that would be shipped and received for a typical ST 3000 transmitter and SFC order Figure 5 Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components Ordered Series 100 ST 3000 Differential pressure transmitter with optional mounting bracket Smart Field Communicator with optional battery charger Shipped Received ST 3000 ST 3000 Installation Guide ST 3000 Quick Shipped User sManual Reference separately Guide if ordered SFC Operating Pocket Guide Z Card Battery Pack Leads 8 Battery Charger optional Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 11 1 4 Transmitter SFC Order continued About documentation Various documents are available for reference describing how to install configure and operate the ST 3000 transmitter e ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide Using SFC Model STS103 34 ST 33 39 One copy is shipped with every transmitter This document provides information for checking
211. he transmitter is a Series 100 and a 9 is a Series 900 For a complete breakdown of the Table selections in your model number please refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide that is provided as a separate document However a description of the available Table III options is given in Appendix A of this manual for handy reference Previous models of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series 100 Series 100e Series 600 and Series 900 have been supplied at various times since the ST 3000 was introduced in 1983 While all these transmitters are functionally alike there are differences in housing and electronics design This manual only applies for Release 300 Series 100 transmitters with software version 3 0 or greater and Release 300 Series 900 transmitters with software version b 0 or greater See the procedure on page 50 to use the SFC to check your transmitter s software version Release 300 transmitters can be identified by the R300 designation on the nameplate Except for optional zero and span adjustments the ST 3000 has no physical adjustments You need an SFC to make any adjustments in an ST 3000 transmitter Alternately certain adjustments can be made through the Universal Station if the transmitter is digitally integrated with a Honeywell TPS system or through a PC running Honeywell SCT 3000 software Table 1 illustrates the present ST 3000 pressure transmitter family
212. he transmitter or loop wiring you are ready to start communicating with the transmitter The procedure in Table 17 outlines the steps for communications with an ST 3000 transmitter without an assigned tag number Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Slide power switch on left side of SFC to SFC runs its self check and displays ON position initial prompt 2 Pult TIIN TM ATNT If this prompt appears transmitter is Analog mode of operation This is the factory default mode of operation setting Put your control OR loop in the manual mode of operation before initiating SFC communications Note that you must do this separately through the receiving device in the loop If this prompt appears transmitter is E IX MIT E s s RELAIS ee in Digital DE mode of operation 3 DE READ IrTAS INO T TT T TTTTTI Be sure any switches that may trip I PS S E C UIRIE DI alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned OR off Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 This prompt does not appear for transmitters operating in DE mode See DE transmitter display response in Step 5 4 NON VOL Confirms that TRIPS are secured Go Required for transmitters operating ENTER to Step 5 for display response in analog mode only Yes Continued on next page 52 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05
213. hten the bolt to a torque of 8 1 to 13 5 N m 6to 10 ft lb Figure 11 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe Once the transmitter is mounted the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position See Table 9 Step 4 for details On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the mounting sleeve Figure 11 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation 1 Pipe Mount 316 SS Weld Nipple standard option Continued on next page 34 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued High Temperature Transmitter Mounting ATTENTION You can mount the High Temperature transmitter directly to the process flange connection or the process piping Figure 12 shows typical pipe and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison To mount a flange mounted transmitter model bolt the transmitter s flange to the flange on the wall of the tank or process pipe It is the End User s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter s service condition Once the transmitter is mounted the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position See Table 9 step 4 On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Figure 12 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations Tank Wall Fl
214. iagnostic Messages for Communication Errors continued Message Description Tlale Infor T T TTT i Transmitter database was incorrect at powerup PEIN jb JbJAITIAISJAISIE PTS SOT Reauestis invalid 51 08517 AlG IN Loop resistance is too low A G IN No response from transmitter TIALS INT T TT TTT T SFC is not operating properly str fe 11 11 Invalid key entry Table 64 summarizes the message displays for possible invalid key errors entry errors Table 64 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry Errors Message Description None Keystroke makes display blink Invalid keystroke BT LT efr Talofat The computed SFC value is outside the display range P TRIAINISIET jHj2 o 3 9jF Interrupt messages Table 65 summarizes messages that may interrupt the SFC display Table 65 Summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC Display Message Meaning Remedy olu T P P T lalolalia Diagnostics has detected a Press STAT key to retrieve cir Isirla rluls critical failure messages Colon The SFC battery is low Recharge the battery iN p P fale PTT TT lelki 13 11 Number Symbol Diagnostics has detected a Press STAT key to retrieve LTIIN ao non critical failure Or the messages or exit the output RiElAp yl tran
215. ial Pressure Gauge Pressure 400 inches H20 1 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 100 psi 7 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 100 psi 7 bar 100 psi 7 bar 300 psi 21 bar 300 psi 21 bar 500 psi 35 bar 500 psi 35 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 3000 psi 210 bar 6000 psi 415 bar 6000 psi 415 bar 10000 psi 690 bar 10000 psi 690 bar Flange Mount 400 inches 20 1 bar 100 psi 7 bar Per selected flange and material ANSI ASME 150 30042 DN PN40 Remote Seal 400 inches 20 1 bar 100 psi 7 bar Lesser MAWP of either Remote Seal selected or transmitter pressure rating Absolute Pressure Note Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP may vary with materials of construction and process temperature For more specific information refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar 500 psia 35 bar 500 psia 35 bar Guide or transmitter nameplate NOTE To convert bar values to kilopascals kPa multiply by 100 For example 3 5 bar equals 350 kPa 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 21 3 4 Considerations for SFC Install SFC battery If the SFC battery pack was removed for shipping and or storage you pack will have to install the battery pack and charge the batteries before you
216. iaphragm or diaphragms in the transmitter s meter body may become coated with a residue from the process medium The latter is also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type transmitters In most cases you can readily remove the process head or heads from the transmitter s meter body to clean the process head cavity and inspect the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms For flange mount and remote seal diaphragms you may only need to run a purge line in the tank to rinse off the face of the diaphragm The procedure in Table 53 outlines the general steps for inspecting and cleaning barrier diaphragms You may have to modify the steps to meet your particular process or transmitter model requirements Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Step Action 1 Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process Open vent in process head to drain fluid from transmitter s meter body if required ATTENTION we recommeng that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart 2 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter body Remove process heads and bolts Process head Center section Process head Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 171 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued Procedure continued Table 53 Inspecting and Clea
217. in the Specification Sheets for the given transmitter models This section assumes that the mounting dimensions have already been taken into account and the mounting area can accommodate the transmitter Bracket mounting Table 9 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a bracket Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket Step Action 1 If you are using an Then optional mounting bracket go to Step 2 existing mounting bracket go to Step 3 2 Position bracket on 2 inch 50 8 mm horizontal or vertical pipe and install U bolt around pipe and through holes in bracket Secure with nuts and lockwashers provided Example Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical pipe Nuts and Nuts and Lockwashers Lockwashers Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket Horizontal Pipe Vertical Pipe U Bolt Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 27 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Bracket mounting continued Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket continued Step Action Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket and secure with bolts and washers provided If transmitter is Then DP type with double ended process heads and or remote seals use alternate mounting holes in end of heads GP and A
218. includes a block off valve and a Tee connector If your piping does not include a Tee connector you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate Figure 45 Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter Flush Mount Transmitter 1 Pipe Mount 316 SS Weld Nipple Progess standard option Figure 46 Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter Maximum Level Flush Mount Transmitter Minimum Level 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 145 7 10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 44 outlines the steps for starting up an absolute pressure AP type transmitter in a pressure measurement application Refer to Figure 47 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 47 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter Process Shut off valve 1 Pipe Plug Union GG valve no 2 Tee connector Absolute Pressure Transmitter For additional overrrange protection use Sprague engineering type gauge saver or Fairchild model 95 gauge guard style 1 ATTENTION For AP transmitters you can only verify that the input and output readings correlate Table 44 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Mea
219. ing Units High and Low You can enter desired lower and upper high display limits to scale flow GPM GPH or Custom engineering units to represent the transmitter s to 100 output within the meter s display range of 19 990 000 ATTENTION when the transmitter is set to SQUARE ROOT output conformity the lower display limit for flow units GPM GPH and Custom unit must equal zero 0 Continued on next page 66 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration The flowchart in Figure 25 summarizes the typical entries selections decision summary decisions associated with configuring an ST 3000 pressure transmitter Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration Assign a unique tag number consisting of up to 8 alphanumeric characters to identify this transmitter See procedure in Table 21 for entry details Press ID key and acknowledge TRIPS SECURED prompt if required to call up SFC prompt TAG NO Use NUM ALPHA key to toggle between Alpha mode and Numeric mode to enter alphabetic characters and numbers respectively through SFC keys Establish communications and enter assigned Tag Number at SFC configuration prompt TAG NO Determine if transmitter s output is to represent a straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurements See proced
220. intrinsically safe Both FMRC and CSA define the entity parameters in Tables D 1 and D 2 Table D 1 Factory Mutual FM Entity Parameters 1 Factory Mutual Approval e Explosionproof for Class I Division 1 Groups A B C amp D Dust Ignitionproof for Class II Division 1 Groups E F amp G Suitable for Class 111 Division 1 Conduit seals required within 18 of enclosure Group A only Intrinsically Safe for use in Class Division 1 Groups A B C amp D Class II Division 1 Groups E F amp G Class III Division 1 T4 at 40 T3A at 93 maximum ambient when connected in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241 Nonincendive for use in Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C amp D Suitable for Classes II amp Ill Division 2 Groups F amp T4 at 93 C maximum ambient hazardous locations 42 Vdc max Environmental Indoor amp outdoor hazardous locations NEMA 4X Intrinsic Safety Class I II III Divisions 1 and Entity Parameters 09 2 Groups A G With no integral indicator or with integral Smart Meter option SM Li 150 uH With Analog Meter option ME 1 Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 257 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations continued Table D 2 CSA Entity Parameters Canadian Standards Association CSA e Explosion Proof for Class I Division 1
221. inued Step Action 8 Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new meter body Finger tighten nuts Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter Meter Body T Flex Tape O ring Process head Process head 9 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration Tighten head bolts in stages of 1 3 full torque 2 3 full torque and then full torque Always tighten head bolts in sequence shown and in these 1 O O 3 stages 1 1 3 full torque 2 2 3 full torque 3 Full torque 4 O O 2 22519 Continued on next page 180 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 9 5 Replacing Meter Body continued Procedure continued Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step Action 10 Feed flex tape on new meter body through neck of housing and screw new meter body into housing until bottom of header portion of center section is approximately flush with neck of electronics housing 11 Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in header Loosen set screw half turn rotate housing to desired position and tighten set screw 12 Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 in Table 52 as applicable to return PWA and bracket to transmitter housing We recommend that you lubricate end cap O ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning 33 or equiv
222. is turned off before 30 seconds the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter power is restored the meter configuration will revert to the previous settings The procedure in Table 30 outlines the steps for setting up the configuration for a Local Smart Meter using an SFC Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 B CONF st clo NF life 1 Calls up first configuration prompt sr core Jer 4 Calls next configuration prompt Prompt asks if you want to access meter configuration function If you want to access it go to Step 3 If you do not want to access it press CLR key to exit function or NEXT key to call up next configuration parameter Continued on next page 98 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 3 NON VOL ENTER YES jr C o n f SIF C WIO RIKI I N I G Mie t r Cloin flil g Miejt le r P irlelslelnit Enters meter configuration function and confirms that Local Smart Meter is pre
223. it I Return to configuration parameter No 5 RE ST OR E menu selection 25 LIIN plep 30 1 1 Exit configuration and verify that transmitter s ID now reflects ID from restored database Tag number PT 3011 is used for example purposes only Change tag number and other configuration data as required 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 163 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display Display description Figure 51 shows a Local Smart Meter display with all its indicators and segments lit for reference and Table 50 gives a brief description of what the indications mean Figure 51 Display With All Indicators Lit Honeywell 0 100 18 8 80 ET z FLOW OUTPUT MODE ANALOG In H20 CHECK STATUS GPH mmHg VALUE KNOWN VALUE Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51 Display Indicator What It Means When Lit 3 17 Segment Bargraph Gives a gross indication of the transmitter s PV output from 0 to 100 Digital Readout Gives an indication of the transmitter s PV output in either percent of span or actual engineering units The display range is 19 990 000 and it is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible within the limits of the display second decimal place expands the precision of range valu
224. ith carbon steel bolts 30754419 023 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapter with 316 st steel NACE bolts K1 Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg 2 K2 Flange adapter 1 K3 Gasket 1 K5 30757503 001 Housing seal kit 1 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 227 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 64 High Temperature Meter Body lt 1 lt 1 Sanitary Seal Small Flange NPT Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate plus R300 Series 100 replacement meter body 1 Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket 51204982 001 Sanitary Seal Head GP I Stainless Steel Head wl st stl hardware 51204982 003 Sanitary Seal Head GP I Stainless Steel Head w SS NACE hardware 51204982 002 Sanitary Seal Head GP I Hastelloy Head w st stl hardware 51204984 001 Gasket GP I includes Teflon gasket and Viton O ring Flange Adapter Not Shown 51204983 001 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 002 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 017 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 018 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT st stl
225. itions in this manual may invalidate this product s conformity with the Explosive Atmospheres Pressure Equipment and EMC Directives Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 6 04 6 04 Marking Honeywell s Model ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter with the following ATEX Directive nameplates attached has been certified to comply with Directive 94 9 EC of the European Parliament and the Council as published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No L 100 1 on 19 April 1994 The following information is provided as part of the labeling of the transmitter e Name and Address of the manufacturer Honeywell Phoenix AZ 85053 USA e Notified Body identification KEMA Quality B V Arnhem the Netherlands C 0344 e For complete model number see the Model Selection Guide for the particular model of pressure transmitter e The serial number of the transmitter is located on the Meter Body data plate The first two digits of the serial number identify the year 02 and the second two digits identify the week of the year 23 for example 0223xxxxxxxx indicates that the product was manufactured in 2002 in the 23 week Apparatus Marked The user must determine the type of protection required for installation the with Multiple equipment The user shall then check the box v adjacent to the type of protection Types of u
226. its If you selected Custom or Flow engineering Lower and upper display limits have not been units go to Tables 35 and 36 to set lower and set for Custom or Flow engineering units upper display limits for smart meter display ywell v 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 109 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower and The Table 34 shows the restrictions on setting the display values for Upper Display Values given engineering units and output conformity selections Table 34 Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display Values Engineering Output Set Units code Conformity Lower Display Value Upper Display Value EUO through EUC Linear No set automatically No set automatically Pressure type units EUO EUD EUE and EUF Square root No fixed at zero Yes GPM GPH or Custom Use Table 36 EUF Linear Yes Yes Custom Use Table 35 Use Table 36 Setting Lower and To set the lower and upper display limit values for the meter display Upper Display Values perform the procedures in Tables 35 and 36 Also note that in each procedure you must e First set the magnitude range for each display value This enables the multiplier K on the display for indicating larger ranges greater than 19999 and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or right depending on the precision you want to show for that value e Next set the
227. itter Follow the steps in Table 17 if needed 5 While reading the transmitter s output on an SFC or a voltmeter position the transmitter so the output reading is at or near zero and then completely tighten the mounting bolts 6 Perform an input zero correct function using the SFC and following the steps below This corrects the transmitter for any minor error that may occur after the mounting bolts are tightened Initiate shift key selection Press key INPUT J OUT Press EUT key Read applied input pressure RESET DE Press key Prompt asks if the applied input pressure equals zero input If it is zero input go to next keystroke If it is not press CLR key to exit function and repeat keystrokes NON VOL ENTER Yes A Press key Zero input is set equal to applied input pressure 8 Remove the tube from between the input connections the power and the digital voltmeter or SFC 9 Continue with the remaining installation tasks Continued on next page 32 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Flange mounting To mount a flange mounted transmitter model bolt the transmitter s flange to the flange pipe on the wall of the tank ATTENTION On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Figure 10 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange
228. itters installed as explosionproof in a Class I Division 1 Group B C or D Hazardous Classified Locations do not require an explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit NOTE Installation should conform to all national and local electrical code requirements When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location keep covers tight while the transmitter is energized Disconnect power to the transmitter in the non hazardous area prior to removing end caps for service When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous Location disconnect power to the transmitter in the non hazardous area or determine that the location is non hazardous prior to disconnecting or connecting the transmitter wires Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 47 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Existing meter Existing analog meters and SM 3000 Smart Meters can be connected to connections Release 300 transmitters Examples of each meter type are shown below Analog Meter Analog Meter Connections You can connect the analog meter 2 wires integrally to Release 300 transmitter s terminal block inside the electronics housing However there are alternate wiring methods for connecting an analog meter remotely with the loop wiring Section 13 in this manual illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting an analog meter to Release 300 transmitters
229. ity that the following products ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitters Series 100 and 900 Release 300 per attached list to which this declaration relates are in conformity with the protection requirements of Council Directive 94 9 EC ATEX Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres and 89 336 EEC EMC Directive as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility The models covered by this Declaration and evidence of conformity with the ATEX Directive are shown on the attached list Conformity to the ATEX Directive is in accordance with the following European standards EN 50014 1997 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres General Requirements EN 50018 2000 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Flameproof Enclosure d EN 50020 1994 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Intrinsic Safety i EN 50284 1999 Special Requirements for Construction Test and Marking of Electrical Apparatus of Equipment Group II Category 1 G Notified EC Type Examination Certificates Production Quality Assurance Notification Bodies CIE Groupe Bureau Veritas 0081 KEMA Quality B V 0344 33 Avenue du G n ral Leclerc Utrechtseweg 310 92260 Fontenay aux Roses 6812 AR Arnhem France The N
230. kit 172 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 032 Flange adapter kit 1 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 033 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 034 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 041 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 042 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 035 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 036 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 229 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 65 SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories K1 K2 1 K3 K4 Continued on next page 230 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 80 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 65 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Battery pack assembly 1 See Figure 62 Style A No longer available Order conversion kit 30755131 001 30755080 501 Style B 30753046 501 LCD assembly 1 Interface cable assembly with alligator clips 1 30752453 501 6 feet 1 8 meters long
231. lange at the zero level of the tank kk These applications also apply for GP and AP type transmitters equipped with remote seals However you can only confirm that input pressure correlates with transmitter output in processes using remote seal connections Running Analog Output Check 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 125 Background ATTENTION You can put the transmitter into a constant current source mode to checkout other instruments in the loop such as recorders controllers and positioners Using the SFC you can tell the transmitter to change its output to any value between 0 4mA and 100 20mA percent and maintain that output This makes it easy to verify loop operation through the accurate simulation of transmitter output signals before bringing the loop on line Note that the constant current source mode is also referred to as the output mode The transmitter does not measure the input or update the output while it is in the constant current source mode Procedure The procedure in Table 38 outlines the steps for using a transmitter in its output mode and clearing the output mode Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant Current Source Mode Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections a typical you can also view receiv
232. le Head H1 Differential Pressure Transmitter with F remote seals Zero Level empty B B B HP Side ATTENTION For the procedure in Table 45 we are assuming that the tank is empty and the remote seal flanges are installed at their final positions The transmitter is a model STR93D or STR12D with a compound characterized meter body The DP transmitter has its high pressure HP side connected to the tank s lower flange and low pressure LP side connected to the upper flange Note that connections would be reversed for a model STR13D transmitter or a model STR12D transmitter without a compound characterized meter body Continued on next page 148 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals continued Procedure continued Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 DE READ mals
233. lections with largest range available magnitude range selection or selected Decrease button to call up previous magnitude range selection Honeywell NOTE This action enables the multiplier K for indicating larger ranges and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or right depending on which button is pushed The display shows largest positive number for given range selection so you can select a range that is just larger than the range to be press and noia to set for best display precision Hold scroll backward scroll forward respective key to scroll forward or Vide drap through selections backward through the selections o Repeat this action until desired selection is on 19 99K display For example purposes only largest 199 9K The K multiplier range 19990K is selected in this procedure 1999K palatine didi 19990K reading on the display Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper Readout goes blank except for first active digit value setting which will be O unless upper value was set before Honeywell Continued on next page 116 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase button to select the next available digit value or Decrease button to selec
234. ll return to its previous state Table 31 shows an illustration of the local smart meter and a description of the pushbuttons on the meter face Table 31 Smart Meter Pushbutton Description Sar Water Pustoutions Femme ST 3000 transmitters UPPER VALUE Selects Upper Range Value setting URV 100 F 0 1 8 8 FLOW UNITS SET Selects engineering units for meter OUTPUTMODE ANALOG quo display CHECK STATUS KNOWN VALUE SPM PSI LOWER VALUE Selects Lower Range Value LRV Decrease pushbutton Po Increase pushbutton Continued on next page 104 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Transmitter Output Normally when using a differential type transmitter you can select the Conformity and Smart transmitter s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square Meter Configuration ee ea root calculation for flow measurement applications This linear or square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form See Subsection 6 4 for more details When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement there are certain rules to keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection These rules are described in the following paragraphs 1 The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering u
235. m to 33 ST 25 14 Table 3 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 1 Key Part Number Description Qty No Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 Meter Body replacement kit includes 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Meter body without Process Heads Neoprene O ring Meter Body to Electronica Housing K7 Part no 30752785 007 1 unit Process Head Gasket PTFE K6 Part No 51452560 002 2 unit Specify complete Series 900 Meter Body replacement kit includes 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Meter body without Process Heads Neoprene O ring Meter Body to Electronica Housing K7 Part no 30752785 007 1 unit Process Head Gasket PTFE K6 Part No 51452560 002 2 unit Bolting Kits 51452866 001 Bolts and Nuts Kit Carbon Steel 51452866 002 Bolts A286 SS NACE and Nuts 304 SS NACE Kit 51452866 003 Bolts 316 SS non NACE and Nuts 316 SS non NACE Kit 51452866 004 Bolts B7M and Nuts 7M Kit Each Bolts and Nuts Kit includes stes Bolt Hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 50 Inches long Flange Adapter 4 K4 Nut Hex 7 16 UNC Process Head 4 K8 sss Bolt Hex Head 7 16 UNC X 3 25 inches long Process Head 4 Vent and Plug Kits 30753785 001 Drain and Plug Kit stainless steel 30753787 001 Drain and Plug Kit Monel 30753786 001 Drain and Plug Kit Hastelloy C Each Drain and Plug Kit includes KA o aa Pipe Plug vekuesscsERI
236. mitter installation in non intrinsically safe areas and for intrinsically safe loops in hazardous area locations If you are using the transmitter with Honeywell s TPS system see the previous TPS reference ATTENTION e All wiring must comply with local codes regulations and ordinances e Ifyou will be using the transmitter in a hazardous area be sure to review the hazardous location reference data included in Appendix D of this manual before operating the transmitter Table 16 Wiring the Transmitter Step Action 1 Loosen end cap lock using a 1 5 mm allen wrench and remove end cap cover from terminal block end of electronics housing 2 Feed loop power leads through one of conduit entrances on either side of electronics housing Plug whichever entrance you do not use ATTENTION The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG wire 3 screw terminal block 3 Observing polarity connect positive loop power lead to SIGNAL terminal and negative loop power lead to SIGNAL terminal Example Connecting loop power to transmitter 5 screw terminal option LP 4 Replace end cap and tighten end cap lock Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 45 4 4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter continued Approval body requirements Lightning protection If your transmitter was ordered with Table III option 3N for self declared approval per 94 9 EC
237. mperature Values to 30 psig Pressure Saturated Superheat Added Final Steam Actual Temperature 1 Temperature Temperature of Steam When Reduced From 1 1 equals pressure in column one with superheat added 250 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Appendix C Configuration Record Sheet ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Configuration Record Sheet Model Number series _ 100 900 Type 1 pP LJ ae L ns L FM Range Mode of Operation Analog DE Tag Number Output Conformity L Linear Square Root Damping Time Seconds L_ 0 00 los Llio LJ20 L lao 1 amp o liso L 320 Engineering Units 20 1 psi pa L bar Kerm mmH20 4c L mmHg oc L mbar L Giem2 inng 32F mH20_4c L H20 esr L L H20_60F Lower Range Value 4 mAdc Upper Range Value 20 mAdc Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only C Single Range Dual Range STDC L single Range w sv Message Format DE Mode Only W O DB 4 Byte W DB 6 Byte Failsafe Mode STDC Card DE Mode Only F S B O Lo F S FSO B O Lo rise F s Fso B O Hi L F S LKG L F S FSO LKG Failsafe Direction Analog Mode Upscale Downscale Write Protect Option Read and Write Read Only Configured By Date 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 251 252 ST 30
238. n correct go to Step 18 lower than go to Step 16 20mA or 5V higher than go to Step 17 20mA or 5V 16 Gradually raise output to 20mA or NEXT m Su 1 PT injet 1 OUT P Is ou r e 1 j2 2 m A ojo TP 1 PT ijs Io R biaje JSJP AIN 5V reading Repeat this Step as required Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 187 10 3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal continued Procedure continued Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 17 vi olule 1 T felt mene Gradually decrease output to 20 PREV DE cC 1 or sv i Repeat this Step as required Ou 1 PT aa 5 OU TP 11 PT 30118 5 E D j2 2im A TP 111 PTI 3011 O R RE CIT 18 A olu rIP 1 T elt Initiate shift key selection RU l 1 Ie prp mp T NON VOL TT SPELT PTT EPF osaan memon Ts takes ENTER S IFIC w i yes B approximately 8 seconds 1 PT 30114 POLAT TIAL ELEN PT 3jo t t e PERLE 19 T Pity lop ae Call up output for display OUT 5
239. n and display diagnostic messages to identify transmitter communication or operator error problems SFC model As Honeywell s family of Smartline Transmitters has evolved the SFC differences has been changed to meet new model and functionality requirements Besides different software versions some major differences exist between these four SFC model designations e STS100 e STS101 e STS102 e STS103 Table 2 summarizes the differences between the four SFC models for reference Table 2 SFC Model Differences If SFC Then it is compatible And additional functions model is with include STS100 Analog only ST 3000 smart Not applicable pressure transmitters STS101 Analog only ST 3000 smart Corrects Reset Failsafe Direction pressure transmitters if and Sensor Temperature SFC software version is less indication than 5 0 Analog and Digital DE Changing the mode from analog mode ST 3000 pressure to digital or digital to analog transmitters and STT 3000 configuration parameters for STT temperature transmitters 3000 and scratch pad SFC software version is 5 0 configuration area for ST 3000 or greater Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 9 1 3 Smart Field Communicator continued SFC Model Differences continued Then it is compatible with And additional functions include Analog and Digital DE mode ST 3000 pressure transmitters S
240. n as described in Table 20 e 4 Byte type e 6 Byte type Procedure The procedure in Table 29 outlines the steps for selecting a 6 Byte type format for example purposes only Table 29 Selecting Message Format Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 ole PITI a1 Initiate shift key selection xc PETER TT OF CONES men ice TT TT ITEM TET Is In 1 171517 2 A OTE cloin F poa Calls up next DE CONFIG menu NEXT w o DB 4 Bly tle item Message format selection appears 3 DE CONF ole Pit ppp Calls up next message format gt Gen wir Cle selection Repeatedly press MENU ITEM ITEN key to cycle between two format selections See Table 19 for details Stop when w DB 6 Byte selection is on display 4 7 Enters change SFC calls ENTER ENTERED IN 5 F C next DE configuration parameter ves This action only applies if selection ET TG 7113101111 is changed Otherwise must press Bg eee EE CLR key to exit function A NEXT key to call up next parameter or Y PREV key to call up previous parameter 5 CLR ole Prompt asks if change entered in NO LOAD C H SFC is to be downloaded to transmitter If you want to download change go to Step 6 If you do not want to download change press CLR key to exit function This action only applies
241. n matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 14 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 131 7 5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 40outlines the steps for starting up a differential pressure DP type transmitter in a pressure measurement application Refer to Figure 40 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections Figure 40 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter Valve D Differential Pressure Transmitter HP side HP Vent 22 Nerei LP side LP Vent Table 40 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Close valve D See Figure 40 for sample piping arrangement 3 Open plug C and valve A
242. n outside diameter of 150 mm 5 91 in 2 inch 150 serrated face flange with 8 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 127 mm 5 00 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm 6 50 in 3 inch 1502 serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 152 4 mm 6 00 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm 7 48 in 3 inch 300 serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 2 mm 7 8 in diameter on 168 3 mm 6 62 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 210 mm 8 27 in 4 inch 1502 serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 190 5 mm 7 50 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 230 mm 9 05 in 4 inch 300 serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 2 mm 7 8 in diameter on 255 mm 10 04 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm 7 87 in DN 50 PN 40 serrated face flange with 4 holes 18 mm 0 71 in diameter on 125 mm 4 92 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm 6 50 in DN 80 PN 40 serrated face flange with 8 holes 18 mm 0 71 in diameter on 160 mm 6 30 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm 7 87 in DN 100 PN 40 serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 mm 0 87 in diameter on 190 mm 7 48 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 235 mm 9 25 in Pseudo Flange Head 2 inch 150 lbs serrated face flange with 4 holes 15 9 mm 5 8 in diameter on 120 6 mm 4 3 4 in diameter
243. ng Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 6 a Press and hold ZERO button on Local Zero and Span assembly or Local Smart Meter Honeywell aR YV yv Y Y SEL VALUE e 100 1 00 ANALOG bas ee ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default unit of percent during this operation If the error code appears on the display you are working with a model STD110 transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span adjustments b Press Decrease button once to complete this function ATTENTION The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1 2 second and then returns reading 0 Honeywell var Y v M v f uppen SEL VALUE 0 100 0 00 ANALOG ee Display goes blank for 1 2 second and returns with zero reading c Check that milliammeter reading equals 4 mA and release ZERO button ATTENTION jf mitliammeter reading doesn t change be sure you are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local adjustments The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set engineering units after you release the ZERO button Continued on next page 88 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Continued Procedure continued Table27 Setting Range Values Using Local Ze
244. ng as you change the tag number ID in the restored database NOTE The configuration data for the optional Local Smart Meter is stored in a memory located on the transmitter s PWA If a database save and restore is done with the SFC then the meter configuration is restored along with the transmitter configuration Figure 50 shows a graphical summation of the save and restore database function Summary of Save and Restore Database Function Saved Configuration Database ID PT 3011 Output Form LINEAR Damping Time 2 0 sec LRV 35 0 psi URV 200 0 psi Output Signal Mode SINGLE RNG Message Format 6 BYTE Failsafe Mode Read only wenn many t Working Memory ST 3000 m9 Restored Configuration Database ID PT 3011 Output Form LINEAR 2 0 sec 35 0 psi 200 0 psi Output Signal Mode SINGLE RNG Message Format 6 BYTE Failsafe Mode Read Only Working Memory o e ST 3000 Continued on next page 160 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database continued Procedure The procedure in Table 49 outlines the steps for saving a database from one transmitter and restoring it in another Table 4
245. ng lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body The same precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 245 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Steam heating continued See Figure B 8 and B 9 for typical piping installations Table B 1 summarizes the temperature ranges for the various freeze protection systems Table B 1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems Operating Liquid Seals Diaphragm Steam ae d Electric Heat Temperature Seals NoSeals Range Ethylene Dibutyl 5 Thermo Glycol Phthalate Valve Tu stated Note Broken lines indicate areas of caution Continued on next page 246 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Steam heating continued Figure B 8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating Steam Supply low pressure Pipe insulated with waterproof outer cover shut off valve 1 4 OD steam tracer line Impulse piping with 1 4 thick insulation lt q Steam heat tracer line Pipe strap about every 15 Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping Steam trap or 1 2 3 valve manifold condensate standard type temperature Differential pressure valvle transmitter lt insulated enclo
246. ngle Range W SV Procedure The procedure in Table 28 outlines the steps for selecting a Single Range W SV mode for example purposes only Table 28 Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 UTI INT T ove felt loa Initiate shift key selection SRE TT stay DE CONF Plt Taper Calls up DE CONFIG menu Output er Is Fic WORKING T 14 signal mode selection appears ITEM DE CONF 3011 Sli 2 DE ole TPIT Calls up next output signal mode MENU 5 11 9 Ring wisi selection Dle CJO N F Plt 3011 Repeatedly press MENU ITEM key to Rjs w s e S D 6D step through all output signal mode ITEM selections listed in Table 20 in sequence Stop when Single Range W SV mode is on display Continued on next page 92 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only continued Procedure continued Table 28 Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 3 NON VOL oye Plt Enters change in SFC and calls up ENTER EJ NIT EIRIE D 1 next DE configuration parameter Yes This action only applies if selection OTE Plt ppp is changed Otherwise must press
247. ning 33 or equivalent before you replace end cap ATTENTION Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper viewing through end cap window You can rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments 10 Return transmitter to service and turn ON power 11 If applicable verify Local Smart Meter configuration data Reconfigure selected engineering units and lower and upper display range values as required See Subsections 6 11 and or 6 12 for details 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 177 9 5 Procedure Replacing Meter Body You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or only the meter body on selected DP GP and AP transmitters by using the existing process head s Use the procedure in Table 56 to install a meter body only Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only Step Action 1 Complete first 3 Steps in Table 55 as applicable to remove PWA Use 4 mm size hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside 1 Z lt q Set Screw e Process Head Process Head Meter Body i weI o Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it from electronics housing Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center section Remove process head
248. ning Barrier Diaphragms continued Step Action 3 Remove O ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion Look for possible residue and clean if necessary NOTE If diaphragm is dented has distorted convolutions or radial wrinkles performance may be affected Contact TAC for assistance Replace O ring ATTENTION We recommend that you install a new O ring whenever a process head is removed for cleaning The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single head design has two O ring grooves A large one which is 2 in 50 8 mm in diameter and a small one which is 1 3 in 33 mm in diameter as shown in the following illustration On high pressure model STG180 GP transmitters be sure to use a small O ring in the smaller inner groove On other models of GP and AP transmitters use a large O ring in the larger outer groove Never use both O rings together Larger O ring Smaller O ring groove for groove for lower pressure high pressure applications applications GP AP Process Head For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual head design see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters in Step 2 Continued on next page 172 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms continued
249. nits you can select for the smart meter display e When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR you can select only pressure type engineering units See Table 32 e When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT you can select only flow type engineering units GPM and GPH e The percent and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity configuration 2 Additionally the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter s 0 to 100 output e f you select pressure type engineering units you cannot set the lower or upper display limits These values are automatically set when you select the engineering units e You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity The lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 for a transmitter in square root mode and cannot be changed e You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you have selected custom engineering units EUF and the transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR When setting the lower and upper display limits if you let either the lower or upper display limit setting time out after thirty seconds the meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous settings The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting
250. nting Sleeve Kit 51204497 001 Calibration Sleeve Kit Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 225 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 63 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body Extended Flange Design 1 Pseudo Flange Design Continued on next page 226 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 78 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 63 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 30749372 005 O ring seal 1 30749372 001 O ring seal 1 Optional Flange Adapter Not Shown 30754419 006 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts 30754419 008 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts 30754419 022 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapter with 316 st steel NACE bolts 30754419 024 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapter with 316 st steel NACE bolts K1 Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg 2 K2 Flange adapter 1 K3 Gasket 1 K4 Filter screen 1 30754419 007 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapter w
251. nting screws so you can remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA Set PWA aside Mounting Screws PWA Connector Side Meter cable is installed between PWA and mounting bracket J4 Meter Connector Mounting Meter Cable Restraining Bracket Clip Orient mounting bracket as noted above with meter cable still located in slot on its right hand side install mounting screws through bracket and replacement PWA and install retainers to hold screws in place Plug meter cable into connector J4 on PWA and be sure cable is still under restraining clip on front of bracket Go to Step 9 Continued on next page 176 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 9 4 Replacing PWA continued Procedure continued Table 55 Replacing PWA continued Step Action 7 Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA side without cable connectors Remove screw retainers from other side of mounting screws so you can remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA Set PWA aside Mounting Screws PWA Connector Side Mounting Bracket 8 Orient mounting bracket as noted above install mounting screws through bracket and replacement PWA and install retainers to hold screws in place 9 Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 as applicable to install PWA and bracket to transmitter housing We recommend that you lubricate end cap O ring with silicon grease such as Dow Cor
252. nts continued Step Action 4 Turn ON transmitter power and let it warm up for a few minutes Using an accurate pressure source apply desired zero equivalent pressure to transmitter ATTENTION For differential pressure transmitters apply pressure to the high pressure head for positive range values or vent both heads to atmosphere for zero If zero is to equal a negative value apply the equivalent pressure to the low pressure head For example if zero is to equal 10 inH2O you would apply 10 inH2O to the low pressure head and vent the high pressure head for the zero adjustment 5 Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA If reading Then is less or greater than 4 mA go to Step 6 is correct go to Step 7 ATTENTION jf you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustment option you may substitute the Local Smart Meter readings for the milliammeter readings For example with zero input pressure applied assume that the meter reads 4 inH2O instead of 0 inH2O In this case the meter reading is greater than 0 or 4 mA Example Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches of water Honeywell v v v v UPPER Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 87 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Continued Procedure continued Table 27 Setting Range Values Usi
253. nued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 161 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database continued Procedure continued Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 11 NONEM 5 IolaA T A Answer yes to prompt and initiate ENTER sF e WORKING L database save function es Esq psp pe peprp E CET i Database saved to SFC HOLD memory SAvE RESTORE 5 IE 12 Disconnect SFC and connect it to loop Be sure to put analog loop into wiring for transmitter whose database is manual mode to be restored ATTENTION pe sure to leave SFC power on The saved database will be lost if the SFC power is turned off 13 DE READ ING TT T T TTTITTI Be sure any switches that may trip 1 PS S EIC UIRIE DI alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 14 NON VOL tiale TIT 1 Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER Is Fic wonRk iN G and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter without a tag LN pP number ID whose database is to li l lil REE be restored 15 B sit Call up first configuration parameter a nemen NEXT e lt ejr C i ol
254. num foil to protect it Continued on next page 156 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 8 3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction continued Procedure continued Table 47 Cutting Failsafe Direction Jumper Step Action 1 Turn OFF transmitter power Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of transmitter housing If applicable carefully turn Local Smart Meter counterclockwise to remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and PWA from housing Unplug flex tape and power connectors from component side of PWA and remove PWA With component side of PWA facing you locate failsafe direction jumper W1 and cut it in half with small wire cutter such as dykes See Figure 48 This changes failsafe action from upscale to downscale Reverse applicable previous steps to replace PWA Turn ON transmitter power Figure 49 Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper on PWA Failsafe Direction Jumper e e ee I Power Connector Meter Connector eee ee eee eos 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 157 8 4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area Background You can enter or edit a message in the scratch pad area of memory consisting of two groups of 16 char
255. o ST CONFIG menu Skip Step 13 13 NON VOL ENTER YES Downloads selected pressure engineering unit to transmitter Press CLR key to return to ST CONFIG menu ATTENTION you select a pressure unit with the transmitter in its SQUARE ROOT Flow mode the prompts INVALID REQUEST and Download Error are sequentially displayed after the SFC WORKING prompt and the EU Hi prompt is called up for display At this point you can change the upper display limit as shown in Step 8 or press the NEXT key to call up the EU Lo prompt See Step 10 to change the lower display limit or press the NEXT key and then the CLR key to exit the function 14 If you selected one of these engineering units inH2O mmHg PSI GPM or GPH verify that corresponding unit indicator is lit on Local Smart Meter display If selected engineering unit does not match one of six unit indicators on meter you can use a stick on label from Honeywell drawing 30756918 001 Just peel off matching engineering unit label from drawing and carefully paste it in lower right hand corner of display Continued on next page 102 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Keystroke summary Figure 35 shows the keystroke summary for configuring the Local Smart Meter using the SFC
256. odels except LGP and Flush Mount 4 51196557 002 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP Flush mount STR14G STR17G and STR94G 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 211 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 55 Series 100 900 Electronics Housing Electronics Meter End 4 6 A 2 1 K1 5 Figure 56 Series 100 900 Electronics Housing Terminal Block End Continued on next page 212 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 70 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 55 and 56 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 30756961 501 Cap for Series 900 only 1 30756961 502 Cap for Series 100 only 2 30756996 501 Cap meter for Series 900 only 1 30756996 502 Cap meter for Series 100 only 3 51205897 501T Terminal assembly without lightning protection 1 51404078 502t Terminal assembly with lightning protection 4 51309389 501 Local Zero and Span Adjust Only 1 51309389 502 Local Smart Meter Only 51309389 503 Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust 5 51309397 501 Electronics Module Assembly 1 6 51204038 001 Retaining Clip 1 7 30756997 501 Analog meter 1 K1 30757503 001T Electronics housing seals kit includes O rings K2 51197425 001 Terminal assembly without lightning protection conversion kit includes screws cove
257. omagnetic Flowmeter SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter e Smartline Configuration Toolkit SCT 3000 Installation and Start up Guide 34 ST 10 08 One copy is shipped when the SCT 3000 software application is ordered 12 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 1 5 Local Smart Meter Options Option availability Depending upon your transmitter model it can be equipped with one of the available Local Smart Meter and or Zero and Span Adjust options as shown in Table 3 Table 3 Local Smart Meter Available Options Option Description Available with Transmitter Series Local Smart Meter only Honeywell Honeywell v Local Zero and Span Adjustments only Honeywell Except draft range model STD110 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 13 1 5 Local Smart Meter Options continued About the options Each Local Smart Meter and or Zero and Span Adjust option comes as a separate assembly mounted on the transmitter s Printed Wiring Assembly PWA mounting bracket The meter option assembly includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the transmitter s PWA A meter end cap which includes a window is supplied on the electronics side of the transmitter s housing so you can view the meter display with the end cap installed See Figure 6 Figure 6 ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option Electronics
258. on If you have never used an SFC to talk to an ST 3000 transmitter this section tells you how to establish communications make initial checks and change the transmitter s mode of operation 50 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 5 2 Establishing Communications SFC connection rules Always plug the SFC leads into the jack on the SFC before you connect them to the transmitter e Use this formula to find the maximum filter capacitance allowed across the sense resistor 250 ohm minimum for SFC communications to work C uF 1000 Rsense Connecting SFC Using either leads with alligator clips or easy hooks supplied with the SFC you connect the SFC directly to signal terminals on the transmitter s terminal block or at any convenient location in the 4 to 20 milliampere line Observing polarity connect the red lead to positive and the black lead to negative WARNING When the transmitter s end cap is removed the housing is not explosionproof Figure 19 shows typical SFC connections across loop wiring to the ST 3000 transmitter Non lightning protection terminal connections shown Figure 19 Typical SFC Connections ST 3000 Terminals STR3012 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 51 5 2 Starting Establishing Communications continued communications Once you connect the SFC to t
259. ontains explosion and quenches flame Zone 0 1 amp 2 Limits energy of sparks under 2 faults Zone 1 amp 2 Limits energy of sparks under 1 fault Intrinsic Safety Intrinsic Safety Encapsulation Zone 1 amp 2 Keeps flammable gases out m Zone 1 amp 2 No arcs sparks or hot surface Zone 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Non sparking nA Zone 2 No arcs sparks or hot surfaces under normal conditions Enclosed Break nc Zone 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Limited Energy nA Zone 2 Limits energy of sparks and surface temperature under normal conditions Restricted Breathing Keeps flammable gases out Increased Safety Powder Filled Continued on next page 260 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 D 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations continued IEC Temperature Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous Classification location must also be classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to the maximum operating ambient of the equipment The maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in the following table Maximum Temperature Temperature Identification Number Degrees
260. or quick reference Figure 29 Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Time C DAMP A v NEXT PREV 22509 78 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 6 Selecting Unit of Measurement Background Procedure ATTENTION You can choose to have the pressure measurements displayed in one of the preprogrammed engineering untts in the SFC Table 24 lists the pre programmed units and shows how to select them The engineering units shown in Table 23 are only available in an SFC with software version 3 2 or greater The selections are similar in other software versions but without temperature references and minus the inches of water at 68 F 20 C engineering units Table 24 Pre Programmed Engineering Units for Selection IF you want URV LRV etc displayed D THEN sequentially press key until display shows inches of water at 39 2 F 4 C VINE rs PT stots 4 2 0 inches of water at 68 F 20 Ja LLL ii ii 6 81 millimeters of mercury at 0 C 32 F pounds per square inch kilopascals megapascals 11 lll T ET lil millibar bar s s 1 s 1 J1 l ll ET ET s 1 s 1 s 1 a 1 T m 1 lll l Psl lil
261. or bench set up and calibration e The ability to save unlimited transmitter databases on the PC SCT 3000 Release 3 12 2 or greater is compatible with our latest Series 100 and 900 Release 300 ST 3000 transmitters Please contact your Honeywell representative for more information 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 1 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters About the transmitter The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter comes in a variety of models for measurement applications involving one of these basic types of pressure e Differential Pressure e Gauge Pressure e Absolute Pressure The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits an output signal proportional to the measured variable over a 4 to 20 milliampere two wire loop Its major components are an electronics housing and a meter body as shown in Figure 1 for a typical differential pressure model transmitter Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter Electronics Housing Meter Body The ST 3000 can transmit its output in either an analog 4 to 20 milliampere format or a digital DE protocol format for direct digital communications with our TPS system Allen Bradley PLCs and other control systems Continued on next page 2 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters continued About the transmitter Besides the process variable PV output
262. ounting on tank wall for variable head H1 ATTENTION On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Continued on next page 36 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 4 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter continued Remote seal mounting continued Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter continued Step Action 3 If Transmitter Model Then Connect Remote Number is Seal on STR93D or STR12D low pressure LP side of transmitter to upper flange mounting on tank wall for fixed or constant head H2 STR13D high pressure HP side of transmitter to upper flange mounting on tank wall for fixed or constant head H2 ATTENTION on insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension 4 It is the End User s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter s service condition Figure 13 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation LP Side Model STR93D Model STR12D HP Side gt Model STR13D Maximum Level H2 Fixed Variable Ref Leg Head H1 Minimum Level HP Side Model STR93D Model STR12D LP Side Model STR13D 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 37 4 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Piping arrangements
263. parameter 17 A sir cloiN r le Call up next configuration NEXT 5 50 RI jTJEJMIP parameter 18 sit I Callup next configuration NEXT 5 10777512009 parameter Continued on next page 162 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 8 5 Saving and Restoring a Database continued Procedure continued CLR Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 19 A sit Call up save restore function NEXT 5 E RIE ST ORE 20 NONVOL 5 5 Prompt asks if you want to save ISIAVE database from this transmitter Yes 21 A IslA viEl IR E s T O RIE I Call up prompt for restore function It NEXT RE STORE 0 asks if you want to restore saved database in this transmitter 22 NONVOL RTETSTTTIOTRTIE Prompt asks for confirmation of ARE Y JSJUIRIE database restore function Yes 23 NON VOL RTIETSTTIOIRIE T TT Answer yes to prompt and initiate 5 WORKING database restore function Yes s C SP ss Saved database has been restored Ex SES Ee Se sP written to transmitter s memory S V E R E S T O R E S T OR E Dama Jj 24 EUR Is
264. paratus is used in close proximity the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment 18 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter Evaluate conditions The ST 3000 transmitter is designed to operate in common indoor industrial environments as well as outdoors To assure optimum performance evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices for electronic pressure transmitters e Environmental Conditions Ambient Temperature Relative Humidity e Potential Noise Sources Radio Frequency Interference RFI Electromagnetic Interference EMI e Vibration Sources Pumps Motorized Valves Valve Cavitation e Process Characteristics Temperature Maximum Pressure Rating Figure 7 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before installing a transmitter Figure 7 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation Lightning EMI Relative Humidity Ambient Temperature Large Fan Motors Transceivers RFI po Pump Meter Body vibration Temperature 21003 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 19 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter continued Temperature limits Table
265. pe cross with 2 pipe plugs 1 2 seamless pipe nipple T4 1 2 pipe cross lon 4 1 2 seamless pipe M win 2 pipe plugs slope at least 1 1 2 seamless pipe per foot downward short as possible to reduce head effect 1 2 shut off T pipe union valve thru port or coupling type desirable lt 1 2 3 valve ieee pressure manifold transmitter standard type Differential pressure transmitter Wake both HP and LP connections as shown The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify that the sealing liquid is at its required specific gravity Purging Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous materials from clogging the impulse lines to pressure level or flow transmitters The bubbler system using a constant air flow regulator is particularly common on open tank liquid level applications No heating of impulse lines or transmitter is required but normal precautions are required to keep water out of the air supply system Gas applications We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse lines to transmitters measuring gas flow or pressure Although these components could be heated similar to water and steam applications the simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self draining This means that the impulse lines are connected to the lowest Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 an
266. pressure applied PUT OU TP 1 3 2 1 1 Read 100 output on display for 1129 g corresponding full tank pressure For analog transmission check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA 100 output Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 139 7 7 Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank continued Procedure continued Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 14 Take SFC and milliammeter readings to check that output signal does correspond to empty and full tank pressures If readings don t correspond check that transmitter has been installed correctly If applicable blow down piping to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it Check SFC and milliammeter readings again If readings are still not correct verify transmitter s configuration data and change its range setting if needed ATTENTION Ranging the transmitter in this way makes it reverse acting 15 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 140 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter Procedure The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge pressure GP type transmitter in a pressure or liquid
267. put You can also run an optional output check to ring out an analog loop prior to startup The actual steps in a startup procedure will vary based on the type of transmitter and the measurement application In general we use the SFC to check the transmitter s input and output under static process conditions and make adjustments as required before putting the transmitter into full operation with the running process Choose the applicable procedure to reference in this section from Table 37 based on your type of transmitter and the measurement application The reference procedure will give you some idea of the typical tasks associated with starting up a transmitter in a given application Table 37 Startup Procedure Reference IF transmitter type is AND application is THEN reference procedure in section Differential Flow Measurement 7 4 Pressure DP Pressure Measurement 7 5 Liquid Level Measurement 7 6 for Vented Tank with Dry Reference Leg Liquid Level Measurement 7 7 for Pressurized Tank with Liquid Filled Reference Leg Gauge Pressure Pressure or Liquid Level 7 8 GP Measurement Flush Mount Pressure or Liquid Level 7 9 Measurement Absolute Pressure Pressure Measurement 7 10 AP DP with Remote Liquid Level Measurement 7 11 Seals These applications also apply for flange mounted liquid level type transmitters that are usually mounted directly to a f
268. pv pv pv p ATTENTION The approximate rates of transmission in repeats per second are Data 4 Byte 6 Byte PV value 3 rpts sec 2 5 rpts sec Temperature 1 rpt 2 5 sec 1 rpt 3 sec Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 65 6 2 Overview Continued What to configure continued Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters continued Configuration Data Setting or Selection Failsafe Mode NOTE This parameter is valid only to select the failsafe action for the STDC card in a controller not the transmitter If you are using the STDC card to interface with the ST 3000 transmitter contact Honeywell Technical Assistance in using this parameter ATTENTION An STIMV IOP module has built in failsafe capabilities and ignores this parameter The following parameters are only for transmitters with optional Local Smart Meter Meter Engineering Units If the transmitter is set for LINEAR output conformity you can choose to have the Local Smart Meter display pressure readings in one of these engineering units H20 39F PSI MPa BAR Kg cm 2 inHg 32F mmHg 0C KPa mBAR Jg cm 2 mmH2O 4C mH20O 4C Custom 96 If the transmitter is set for SQUARE ROOT output conformity you can choose to have the Local Smart Meter display flow readings in one of these engineering units GPM GPH Custom 96 Engineer
269. r RE apy HL TT display ATTENTION when assigned the transmitter s tag number also appears in the top row of the display 9 You have established communications with transmitter and are ready to initiate other SFC operations 54 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 5 3 Making Initial Checks Checking mode and Before doing anything else it is a good idea to confirm the transmitter s software mode of operation and identify the version of software being used in the SFC and the transmitter Table 18 outlines the steps for quickly checking the transmitter s mode of operation and software versions of the SFC and the transmitter Table 18 Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software Versions Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 T ple tsi loloto Initiates shift key selection Note that isiHitiFiTI transmitter tag number ST 3000 in top row is used for example A lt gt DE purposes only Q 2 Asks if you want to change to DE cinsi G i digital mode This means transmitter is in analog mode of operation OR Asks if you want to change to analo This means To AlN A Loc transmitter is DE digital mode of operation 2 m eT ITNT T Del sit Exits analog to DE change function No IRIE APO Y HE T T
270. r and terminal block 51197425 002 Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit includes screws cover and terminal block Not 30757504 001 Electronics housing hardware kit DP I GP I LGP I includes screws Shown gasket plate washers cover terminal and spacers Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 213 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Figure 57 Sertes 100 and Sertes 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp STD930 C G H K and L and STD974 K1 Continued on next page 214 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 2 30757104 001 Adapter meter body to electronics housing 1 30753790 001 Carbon steel bolts and nuts kit Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches Ig flange adapter 4 K4 Nut hex metric M12 process heads 4 K8 Bolt hex head metric M12 90mm lg process heads 4 30753791 002 A286 SS NACE bolts and 302 304 SS NACE nuts kit Not Shown Bolt hex h
271. ransmitter s microprocessor receives a communication signal from the SFC identifies the request and sends a response message Figure 4 shows a simplified view of the communication interface provided by an SFC Figure 4 Typical SFC Communication Interface Power E T Supply and 4 to 20 mA line Receiver Como ST 3000 STR3001 The SFC allows you to adjust transmitter values or diagnose potential problems from a remote location such as the control room You can use the SFC to e Configure Define and enter the transmitter s operating parameters including range values output conformity damping time tag number ID and more e Monitor Read the input pressure to the transmitter in engineering units and the transmitter s output in percent e Display Retrieve and display data from the transmitter or SFC memory e Change Mode of Operation Tell transmitter to operate in either its analog 4 20 mA mode or its digital enhanced DE mode Continued on next page ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 1 3 Purpose of SFC Smart Field Communicator continued e Check Current continued Output Use the transmitter to supply the output current desired for verifying analog loop operation troubleshooting or calibrating other components in the analog loop e Troubleshoot Check status of transmitter operatio
272. rative Limits for the product family Refer to individual Specification Sheets for the standard Rated Condition ambient limits for a particular model that as shown on the data plate and certification nameplate may be less than the certification limits 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 5 of 10 6 of 10 Specific Parameters for Non Sparking Zone 2 Installation Honeywell certified Special Conditions for Safe Use Non Sparking Zone 2 Installation Honeywell certified Supply Voltage Supply Current Ambient Temperate Limits Temperature Classification 11 42 Vdc 23 mA 50 C to 93 C T6 at Ta lt 78 C T5 at Ta lt 93 C e The installation of this equipment in Zone 2 hazardous areas must comply with VDE specification 0165 IEC 60079 14 EN 50021 and or valid national standards for installation and operation e Before commissioning of this equipment it must be verified that the power supply voltage cannot exceed the 42 Vdc maximum for 4 20 mA analog and DE equipment e The electronic assemblies in these units are non repairable items and if faulty must be replaced The electrical power supply must be switched off before any replacement and during any time that the wiring terminations are being connected or disconnected 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 6 04 Honeywell 51452504 Revision B DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY x ATEX C C 0344 We declare under our sole responsibil
273. ring units you cannot set the lower or upper display limits These values are automatically set when you select the engineering units e You set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity The lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 for a transmitter in square root mode and cannot be changed Continued on next page 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 97 Transmitter Output Conformity and Smart Meter Configuration continued ATTENTION Procedure e You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you have selected custom engineering units Custom and the transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR When setting the lower and upper display limits if you let either the lower or upper display limit setting time out after thirty seconds the meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous settings The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting either lower or upper depending upon which limit you set first 3 If you change the transmitter s output conformity you must reconfigure the local smart meter as outlined in Table 30 After making any adjustments to the smart meter keep the transmitter powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration is written to non volatile memory If power
274. ro and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 7 Using an accurate pressure source apply pressure equivalent to desired upper range value to transmitter ATTENTION For differential pressure transmitters apply pressure to the high pressure head and be sure that the pressure to the low pressure head is at its reference value 8 Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA If reading Then is not exactly 20 mA go to Step 9 is correct go to Step 10 ATTENTION jf you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustment option you may substitute the Local Smart Meter readings for the milliammeter readings For example with URV input pressure applied assume that the meter reads 396 inH2O instead of 400 inH20O In this case the meter reading is less than 100 or 20 mA Example Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches of water Honeywell v v v v v 100 396 e ANALOG e InH gt O A ee Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 89 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Continued Procedure continued Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 9 a Press and hold SPAN button on Local Zero and Span assembly or Local Smart Meter Honeywell Vv v v v 100
275. rocess head assembly kit carbon steel head model STD110 only 30753908 113 Process head assembly kit st steel head model STD110 only 30753908 114 Process head assembly kit carbon steel DIN head model STD110 only 30753908 115 Process head assembly kit st steel DIN head model STD110 only K1 Pipe plug 2 K2 Vent plug 1 K3 Vent bushing 1 K6 Gasket Viton process head 1 K11 Gasket PTFE flange adapter 1 K5 Process head 1 Figure 58 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 amp STD930 A B E F and J Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 217 12 1 Replacement Parts continued Table 72 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 58 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate plus R300 K1 30757506 001 Head bolts carbon steel 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 001 Head bolts stainless steel NACE 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 002 Process Head Bolting 3 8 UNC 316 SS Non NACE Kit 4 Includes Process Head Bolts and Nuts K2 30757147 001T Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757147 002 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Hea
276. rough the SFC The meter s configuration data is stored in memory on the transmitter s PWA rather than in the meter itself Transmitter Output Normally when using a differential type transmitter you can select the Conformity and Smart transmitters output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square Meter Configuration root calculation for flow measurement applications This linear or square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or output form See Subsection 6 4 for more details When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output measurement there are certain rules to keep in mind which are dependent on the output conformity selection These rules are described in the following paragraphs 1 The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the engineering units you can select for the smart meter display e When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of LINEAR you can select only pressure type engineering units See Table 31 e When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of SQUARE ROOT you can select only flow type engineering units GPM and GPH e The percent and custom engineering units can be selected regardless of output conformity configuration 2 Additionally the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter s 0 to 100 output e f you select pressure type enginee
277. rt Transmitters with inches of water ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39 2 F 4 C For a reverse range enter the upper range value as the LRV and the lower range value as the URV For example to make a 0 to 50 psi range a reverse range enter 50 as the LRV and 0 as the URV The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in the LR V and maintain the present span LRV If you must change both the LRV and URV always change the LRV first Table 25 gives the procedure for the range values for a sample 5 to 45 inH5O at 39 2 F 4 C range Table 25 Keying in LRV and URV Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 E LIR v HT T T felt lona Present LRV setting Pressure for 4 74 jej jajajaja 2 mAdc 0 output 2 S LIR v j1 ejr 1 Key in desired LRV setting It is not 15 1 1 13 9 necessary to key decimal point and zeros for a whole number 3 NON VOL iL T T Pity plona Message exchange is working ENTER ste LETT s F IRT RET T IPTE SIEHT New LRV setting stored in 5 e o H 2 0 3 9 F transmitter s working memory 4 F HT T JP 0 Present URV setting Pressure for 100 1110151 jeje 2 _ 20 mAdc 100 output Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 81 6 7 Setting
278. s Manual 6 05 6 3 Entering a Tag Number continued Procedure continued Table 21 Entering Tag Number continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 T ple Key 3011 as numbers in Tag 3 number it IN TA ll lll ir L IN pip Taje Adi l PITI ioni it IN p P Taje Nol l Bionn Message exchange is working WIOIRIKIIINIGI Loads tag number into transmitter s working memory No l beeni ENTER Yes z 9 2 lt _ ex o lt 9 lt lt N x Keystroke summary Figure 26 shows keystroke summary for entering tag number for quick reference Figure 26 Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag Number DE READ NON VOL analog mode only XN NON VOL ENTER Yes 22506 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 73 6 4 Selecting Output Form Background Procedure ATTENTION You can select the transmitter s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement applications using a differential pressure type transmitter Thus we refer to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity or the output form The procedure in Table 22 shows how to select the desired output conformity If the transmitt
279. s Methods Continued Mechanical diaphragm seals continued You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate expansion and contraction of the fill fluid under varying temperatures without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area In general conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pressure ranges above approximately 75 psig with special large diameter elements required for low pressure or differential pressure measurements You can lag insulate impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process piping but this practice is only common with liquid level applications involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1 2 inch impulse lines Use a tank mounted flanged seal in such installations Otherwise it is more desirable to keep the capillary lengths short the transmitter accessible for maintenance and for flow applications the normal 3 valve manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks Thus the impulse lines valving and diaphragm seals with 1 2 inch connections would be electrically or steam traced with high temperature steam permitted without damage to the transmitter See Figures B 4 and B 5 for typical piping layouts Figure B 4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals The impulse piping 3 valve manifold and upper flanges of the metal diaphragm seals must be insulated and where required also
280. s and bolts Continued on next page 178 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 9 5 Replacing Meter Body continued Procedure continued Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step Action 5 Remove O ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent Replace O ring ATTENTION The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single head design has two O ring grooves A large one which is 2 in 50 8 mm in diameter and a small one which is 1 3 in 33 mm in diameter as shown in the following illustration On high pressure model STG180 GP transmitters be sure to use a small O ring in the smaller inner groove On other models of GP and AP transmitters use a large O ring in the larger outer groove Never use both O rings together Larger O ring Smaller O ring groove for groove for lower pressure high pressure applications applications GP AP Process Head For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual head design see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters in Step 8 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti seize compound such as Neverseize or equivalent Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 179 9 5 Replacing Meter Body continued Procedure continued Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only cont
281. s configuration data and change its range setting if needed 13 Remove SFC and milliammeter from loop 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 151 Section 8 Operation 8 1 Introduction Section Contents This section Includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Accessing Operation Data Changing Default Failsafe Direction Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area Saving and Restoring a Database Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display About this section This section identifies how to access typical data associated with the operation of an ST 3000 transmitter It also includes procedures for e Changing the default failsafe direction e Writing data in the scratch pad area e Saving and Restoring a database and e Monitoring optional Local Smart Meter display 152 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 8 2 Accessing Operation Data Summary You can access this data relevant to the operation of the transmitter using an SFC e Input e Output e Span e Upper Range Limit e Status e Failsafe Output Direction e Sensor Temperature e Scratch Pad Messages e PROM Serial Number Procedure Table 46 summarizes the keystrokes required to access given operation data from the transmitter using an SFC These keystrokes assume that SFC communications have been established with the transmitter by pressing the 1D key Th
282. s in the New Approach directive have by application received certification under ATEX Directive 94 6 EC The Honeywell ST3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter is now ATEX certified and all units manufactured currently and in the future will include labeling that includes all markings required under the ATEX directive Inclusions To ensure that all required information will be available to the user the following items are include with this Addendum for reference 1 Declaration of Conformity ATEX CE0344 Honeywell document number 51452504 Revision B 2 Certificate of Manufacturer Ex 3 G EEx nA ATEX CE Honeywell document number 51452622 Revision O 6 04 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 1 of 10 Purpose and Content of this Addendum CE Conformity 2 of 10 This Addendum includes information required under the ATEX Directive regarding 1 The appearance and meaning of each certification mark CE Mark that appears on the label s affixed to the product 2 Instructions for installation and use of the product Installation information is given in 34 ST 33 39C ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Release 300 and Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Installation Guide Information required for use of this product and additional installation information is included in 34 ST 25 14B ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 User s Manual of which this Addendum is a part Detail
283. s offered by a specialized type of trap which throttles condensate flow based on its temperature This backs up hot water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure assuring temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure Models are available to set the condensate temperature from about 70 to 200 F 21 to 93 C They must be located within 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm of the transmitter body and like all steam traps they also require periodic maintenance The engineering of this type system is more complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss upstream of the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the steam water interface It could occur within the heater coil or further up the steam line thus affecting the heating efficiency within the insulated enclosure Therefore steam control of materials which freeze or become too viscous above 100 F 38 C should probably not be attempted without some experimenting with the specific piping layout used Uncontrolled steam heating even with the best pressure regulation and desuperheating of steam should not be used to maintain transmitter temperatures above 100 F 38 C since this type of fixed Btu input must either over or under heat under normal ambient swings As with electric heating there are many types of commercial steam heating units available such as radiant heaters hollow meter body studs or just tubi
284. s regarding certification marks that appear in labeling for this product are given in this addendum Attention The publications cited above and the functioning and construction except for labeling of the devices described therein are essentially unchanged The purpose of this addendum is to provide details the purpose and appearance of the labels attached to each device under ATEX Directive 94 6 EC Attention Before installing the equipment in a potentially explosive atmosphere please read the information provided in this Addendum which supports the ATEX certifications for this product The ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council Directives 94 9 EC the Explosive Atmospheres ATEX Directive 89 336 EEC the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive and the Pressure Equipment PED directive In conformity with the ATEX directive the CE mark on the certification nameplate includes the Notified Body identification number 0344 KEMA 01ATEXQ3199 adjacent to the EC Type Examination Certificate number In conformity with the Pressure Equipment Directive models rated greater than 200 bar 2 900 psi have an additional CE mark applied to the meter body data plate in accordance with 97 23 EC Article 15 Models rated at less than 200 bar have no CE mark on the meter body data plate per 97 23 EC Article 3 Section 3 Deviation from the installation cond
285. s the same for all LGP meter bodies including Models STG19L and STG99L That is the model number of the meter body is specified on its nameplate In Figure 53 add the information highlighted in Exhibit C in this addendum 10 04 34 ST 99 13 Addendum 2 of 4 Exhibit A Additions to Table 5 Transmitter Type and Model Ambient Temperature Draft Range STD110 40 to 70 40 to 158 40 to 70 40 to 158 Differential Pressure STD125 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 85 40 to 185 STD120 STD130 STD170 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STD904 STD924 STD930 STD974 Gauge Pressure STG140 STG170 STG180 STG14L STG17L STG18L STG19L Process Interface Temperature 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 40 to 93 40 to 93 15 to 65 40 to 85 40 to 200 40 to 200 5 to 149 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 150 T 15 to 95 TT 40 to 125 40 to 257 40 to 302 T 5 to 203 TT 40 to 257 STG14T STG93P STG944 STG974 STG90L STG94L STG97L STG98L STG99L 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 110 40 to 230 Absolute Pressure STA122 40 to 93 40 to 200 See Specification Sheet Upper Range Limit URL 10 inches H gt O 25 mbar Exhibit A Additions to Table 6 Draft Range Differential Pressure 400 inches H20 1 bar Maximum Working Pressure Rating 50 psi 3 5 bar 3000 psi 210 bar Overpressure Rating 50 psi 3 5 bar No overpressure protection is provided 3000 psi 210
286. sed on the equipment certification nameplate Once a type of protection has been Protection checked on the nameplate the equipment shall not then be reinstalled using any of the other certification types Nameplate 51452473 001 ia 4 20 mA DE is mounted on the enclosure The following is a representation of this nameplate 1 LCIE02ATEX6100X EEx ia IC T4 40 TO 93 T5 Ta 40 TO 85 C T6 Ta 40 TO 70 C Ui 30V li 100 mA Pi 1 2W 0344__ A Li 150 HH Ci 4 2 nF l THE ST3000 MAY BE COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING US PATENTS 4502 335 4734873 4135090 8 765 406 581590 51452473 001 155 6 055 633 THEIR FOREIGN COUNTERPARTS AND OTHER PATENTS PENDING Nameplate 51452474 001 d 4 20 mA DE is mounted on the enclosure The following is a representation of this nameplate Il 2 G LCIE 02 ATEX 6099 EEx d IIC T5 40 TO 93 C T6 40 TO 78 C SUPPLY 11 42 VDC l DO NOT OPEN WHILE ENERGIZED ENCLOSURE IP 66 67 THE ST3000 MAY BE COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING US PATENTS 4 502 335 UU TUN 7E Soo WAY BE COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING US PATENTS 40825 1452474 001 ISS B 6 055 633 THEIR FOREIGN COUNTERPARTS AND OTHER PATENTS PENDING 34 ST 99 35 Addendum to 34 ST 25 14 3 of 10 Nameplate 51452618 001 nA 4 20 mA DE is mounted on the enclosure The following is a representation
287. sent Timed prompt Proceed to Step 4 ATTENTION prompt No Meter Present appears prompt times out in a few seconds as described above and calls up the Configure Meter prompt This means that you can access the meter configuration function without the Local Smart Meter installed Proceed to Step 4 If prompt Mtr not Supportd appears prompt times out and returns to previous ST CONFIG prompt See Step 2 This means that you are working with a pre release 300 transmitter that does not support the Local Smart Meter option and therefore can not access the meter configuration function t Je jr Cljoin flilg Clolnltl il glulrlel IM e tle rl Prompt asks if you want to configure Local Smart Meter If you want to configure it go to Step 5 If you do not want to configure it press CLR key to exit function Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 99 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 5 NON VOL Mje tje r Engl Calls up present meter Engineering ENTER 1 1 d Unit selection Note that unit YES H2O 39F is shown for example MmHg 0C purposes only PSI Repeatedl
288. ser s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display The procedure in Table 36 outlines the steps for setting the upper Values display limit to represent the 100 percent URV output of the transmitter This procedure applies only for Flow units GPM or GPH in a transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity or CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for linear or square root output conformity Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper If upper limit display value was previously set display limit setting function KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value flashes in display Press UPPER VALUE button again within 5 Display shows magnitude range selection seconds Otherwise meter exits limit setting function Honeywell ATTENTION The magnitude range selection only applies for setting the display limits This selection does not affect the normal operation of the meter During normal operation the display is automatically ranged to provide the best precision possible Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 115 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press Increase button to call up next Magnitude range se
289. shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Table of Contents References ass iv Tech iGal ASSIStG huata xiii SECTION 1 OVERVIEW FIRST TIME USERS 1 dob 1 soi reete CE ted aote t a e tk ems redit 1 1 2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters u n u un uu u h abis qilla tian 2 1 3 Smart Field Communicator ce retro ett eter i a ce d eter tee 8 1 4 Transmitter SF C OFder u a etum d e te kn ea Fade ER ERRARE AN ede PR e Pa 11 1 5 Local Smart Meter Options nee enne nennen erre nn nnn nns 13 SECTION 2 QUICK START REFERENGCE 15 2 1 Introduction ioo eee det e Et aedi et ei LEE D deste ee ud 15 2 2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On Line Quickly n 16 SECTION 3 PREINSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 17 deli CIDtEOGUCtIOns ite mio nni em icr kaza deeds 17 3 2 Conformity Europe Noti6 uu L L nemen nnne nennen NE 18 3 3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter au
290. sically Safe Ex ia IIC 4 Non Incendive Ex n IIC T6 T4 with Local Smart Meter option 5A approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe OEx ia IIC T6 X No certification 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 235 236 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Appendix B Freeze Protection of Transmitters B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Problem When water is present in the process fluid and ambient temperatures can fall below the freezing point 32 F 0 C pressure transmitters and their piping require freeze protection Transmitters may also require continuous heating if the process fluid is tar wax or other medium which will solidify at normal ambient However uncontrolled steam or electric heating in addition to wasting energy can cause errors and accidentally destroy the transmitter Solution These two basic solutions are possible e Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the freezable process fluid out of direct contact with transmitter e Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm days while protecting against freeze ups under the coldest conditions The other paragraphs in this section review a number of methods for implementing both solutions Sealing liquid method The simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the transmitter meter body and its impulse piping to the process The
291. smitter is in its output mode mode 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 201 11 5 Running Status Check Procedure The procedure in Table 66 shows how to run a status check using the SFC Table 66 Running a Status Check With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring for Be sure to put analog loop into transmitter whose status is to be manual mode checked 2 DE READ mals T T TT T ITT Be sure any switches that may trip T R i IPs SEC URJED alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off 3 NON VOL TA Gl IN o JJ I TT J Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER wolRkK iN e and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 ERT PEL Tas oT rarrENTION dE E deir bianji If a communications error is detected applicable diagnostic messages will cycle at two second intervals in the display and then display returns to the prompt PUT LOOP IN MAN Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to view messages again Communications is not established and all SFC functions are disabled 4 F S DIR 3101111 Initiate status check U STAT STARTS PTT IFE E 21121 19 T PTT I q 1105 1 0 OR SATU s P T 13011 Is 8 IolviE RITIEIMPI OR ST ATs 34 TP elal sITJA T UIS STATU si sona
292. splayed value may not be valid If display is instead of a value transmitter is in critical status 100 0 OUTPUT MODE Meter has detected transmitter output that is not a number Display range is Over Limit Upper value is 19 990 000 and transmitter output is over 100 Transmitter is in output mode Bargraph and readout show value that was entered through SFC Input pressure equal to or greater than 200 Display flashes between 200 or twice current URV in EU and O L Transmitter locks output at 200 and will go no higher regardless of input Continued on next page 166 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continued Operation error codes Table 52 identifies possible meter error codes and what they mean Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes You have tried to set local Zero or Span adjustment in a Honeywell Series 100 transmitter which does not support this option v v v You have tried to set a pressure type engineering unit for a Honeywell transmitter in SQUARE ROOT mode FLOW or have tried TOS to set a flow type engineering unit for a transmitter in 0 LINEAR mode pressure After this error is displayed the E r 1 w meter will return to the unit EU of the Engineering Unit EE e it was displaying before the set function was invoked You may then select ano
293. stance Is there a minimum Correct display note error of 250 ohms resistance between the messages and refer to SFC and the power supply Troubleshooting section in this manual for probable cause power supply Is power applied is there greater than 11 volts at the transmitter and are you within the operating area on the curve in Figure 16 Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 53 5 2 Establishing Communications continued Starting communications continued Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 A Ip E Ix Mir R jt fale Njoj Initiates shift key selection id FEE DE REAG No TL j ii Begi i i egins upload of configuration sir e Wiolnikli ni ej i 3 3 4 database from transmitter Operation completion rate is shown LTITN T AIG percent Note that display for ID response reverts to style used for transmitter in analog mode when upload is completed 8 F S DR Initiates status check STAT 5 If messages other than this STATUS tT TT in di cycled in display refer to the Piri pia Troubleshooting section in this manual for an explanation of the message the probable cause and any corrective action pP j l Signals end of status messages fo
294. sure amp Condensate return from steam trap All steam and condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1 per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate All condensate lines must be protected from freezing Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 247 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Steam heating continued Figure B 9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating 1 4 OD steam tracer line Steam Supply low pressure Pipe insulated with waterproof outer cover lt Shut off valve Wd Steam heat Impulse piping with tracer line valve 1 4 thick insulation Pipe strap about every 15 Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping Shut off valve Union or coupling Process pressure transmitter Steam trap or condensate temperature valvle amp Insulated enclosure lt Condensate return from steam trap All steam and condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1 per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate All condensate lines must be protected from freezing Superheated steam considerations We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212 F 100 C only at the normal atmospheric pressure of about 14 7 pounds per square inch absolute psia If the pressure of steam is increased abov
295. surement With SFC Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 Connect SFC across loop wiring and See Figure 38 for sample SFC and turn it on If possible locate SFC where meter connections in a typical you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential loop If you want to verify transmitter pressure type transmitter output connect a precision milliammeter or voltmeter in loop to compare readings 2 Set process pressure to zero level Allow system to stabilize at zero pressure 3 DE READ mlale INO TT T TTTITTI Be sure any switches that may trip i T R I PS SEC URJED alarms or interlocks associated with analog loop are secured or turned off Continued on next page 146 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 7 10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter continued Procedure continued Table 44 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 4 NON VOL miale No T I L T T TT T i Confirm that TRIPS are secured ENTER sF wolR k iN G T and establish communications with Yes sample transmitter PT 3011 LIN TA No 1319141111 5 A foyult Py 1 T lona Initiate shift key selection INPUT IIN Pluit ay felt Read applied input pressure which J E SFE should be zero PUT IN PUT Jt PT spots
296. t 30 8 8 ENTER IS F C WIORRIKIITINIGI mA 2 2 V A f character appears Yes on right side of display to remind Ou rp 1 j3 oj1 4 you that transmitter is in its output dsjej jejej 1 TTT TT mode 7 Check that receiving device indication is If indication is inaccurate check at its 3096 point If applicable check that calibration of receiving device milliammeter reading is 8 8 mA or voltmeter reading is 2 2 V across 250 ohm resistor 8 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to check Use transmitter output as a indications at these output percentages calibration input source for If output is Then meter ipsur mensIpdo0p reads 096 4 0mA 1 0V 2596 8 0mA 2V 5096 12 0mA 3V 6096 13 6mA 3 4V 8096 16 8mA 4 2V 10096 20 0mA 5 0V 9 INPUT UlT 1 310 111 Exit constant current source mode J POPP xt 70 Check that character disappears OUT PUT from right side of display since 1 PT Bonia transmitter is no longer in output 11229 121 mode CLR Su TP 1 PT 3011 NO 5 K ING L L L 1 1 LIN DP 30141 READ Y Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 127 7 3 Running Analog Output Check continued Procedure continued Figure 38 Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant Current Source Mode Voltmeter Precision Field D Milliammeter Terminals Differential Pressure Type Transmitter
297. t a better understanding of the temperature problem with steam heating In brief do not assume that 30 psig steam is 274 F 134 C and cannot damage a transmitter rated for 250 F 121 C With steam heating as with electrical you should use insulated transmitter body housing impulse piping and valves Continued on next page 244 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Steam heating continued It is common practice to use conventional steam traps on all steam heating systems They permit live superheated steam to enter the heating coils and piping down to the trap You should also use conventional steam traps with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the transmitter under warm day conditions If the heating pipes are not carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate in the piping they could freeze at low temperatures All steam traps require a periodic maintenance program Dirt scale and water softeners will cause traps to stick or jam which result in their either blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam allowing condensate freeze up in cold weather When steam traps are used for cold weather freeze protection of water lines a thermostat controlled steam supply valve which will shut off the steam at ambient temperatures higher than 50 F 10 C will save steam and prevent overheating A more general solution i
298. t meter body is 63 available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models 63 63 63 63 63 63 Meter Bodies High Temperature See Models Figure STG14T 64 STF14T 64 Fal I LGP See Models Figure STG14L 61 STG17L 61 STG18 61 STG90 61 STG94L 61 STG97L 61 STG98 61 STG99L 61 Flush Mount See STG93P 62 isi Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference 10 04 34 ST 99 13 Addendum 4 of 4 Honeywell ST 3000 Smart Transmitter 34 ST 99 22 Release 300 and Smart Field 10 04 Communicator Model STS103 Addendum Transmitter Models STD110 STD120 STD125 STD130 STD170 STD924 STD930 to User s Manual 34 ST 25 14 Overview Related Publications 10 04 Replacement Meterbody and Heads The ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Models e STD110 STD120 STD125 STD130 and STD170 e STD924 and STD930 with optional Tantalum or Monel diaphragm is now being shipped with newly designed meter body and process heads Ifa replacement meter body is needed it should be ordered from the Model Number stated on the meter body nameplate This number includes the letter S after the model number for example STD110S xxx This new transmitter is functionally identical to previous models in that the working ranges Lower Range Limit to Upper Range Limit and intended applications have not changed However the specifications for the maximum Pressure Ratin
299. t the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired value is on display use 9 for example purposes Press and hold to scroll backward through values Press and hold to scroll forward through values O OI OONN O Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in first digit and activate next active digit Readout now displays next active digit which will be zero unless upper value was set before Press Increase button to select the next available digit value or Decrease button to select the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired value is on display use 9 for example purposes Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 117 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Upper Display Values continued Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display continued Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in second digit and activate next active digit Honeywell Readout now displays next active digit which T will be zero unless upper value was set before 0990 00 ANALOG K oA e 9 Press Increase button to select the next Next digit value setting is set to 9 available digit value or Decrease button to select the previous digit value Honeywell v Repeat this action until desired value is on v display use 9 for example purposes Press UPPER VALUE button
300. ted with NACE bolts on process head entered and stored in memory CF Calibration Fixture with 74 NPT Port for pressure source for STG93P only CR A286 stainless steel and 302 304 stainless steel NACE nuts for process heads and 316 stainless steel NACE bolts for mounting flange adapter to process head 316 stainless steel modified DIN process heads Flat mounting bracket carbon steel Calibration test report and certificate of conformance F3399 Certificate of conformance F3391 Certificate of Origin F0195 NACE certificate F0198 Stainless steel reference head carbon steel is standard Low temperature 50 C ambient limit Angle mounting bracket carbon steel Analog meter 0 to 100 linear 0 to 10 square root Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 233 A 1 Table Ill Options Reference continued Codes and descriptions continued If Code 15 Then transmitter option is MS 316LSS Mounting Sleeve requires customer installation to process for STG93P only OX Clean transmitter for Oxygen or Chlorine service with certificate Teflon process head gasket Viton is standard Wired on stainless steel customer tag 4 lines 28 characters per line customer supplied information Additional warranty for 4 years Local Zero and Span adjustments Continued on next page ow ee 9 j 234 ST 3000 Releas
301. ther unit or exit in the normal fashion wA You have tried to select a process variable for the Honeywell transmitter using the VAR SEL button The Variable Select v button is non functioning on the ST 3000 R300 transmitter You have tried to set Lower or Upper display limit for Honeywell pressure type engineering units EU1 to EUC or Lower voy display limit for flow type engineering units EUD EUE or CUSTOM unit EUF in transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output Or you have tried to set upper display limit for flow or Custom unit in transmitter with SQUARE ROOT output and URV set to zero 0 In SQUARE ROOT mode the transmitter s URV cannot equal zero The Lower and Upper display limits only apply for CUSTOM EUF unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output The Upper display limit also applies for FLOW EUD EUE and CUSTOM EUF units with transmitter in SQUARE ROOT mode but the Lower display limit is fixed at zero 0 and cannot be changed Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 167 8 6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display continued Operation error codes continued Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes continued If error indication is Then it means You have tried to set a span value that is outside Honeywell acceptable limits for your transmitter v You hav
302. this formula to find the turndown ratio using the range information for your transmitter Turndown Ratio Upper Range Limit Upper Range Value Lower Range Value Example The turndown ratio for a 400 inH2O transmitter with a range of 0 to 50 inH2O would be 400 Turndown Ratio 50 0 8 1 or 8 1 Procedure The procedure in Table 23 outlines the keystrokes used to adjust the damping time to two seconds as an example Table 23 Adjusting Damping Time Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 1 plam P HT pph Present damping time in seconds EENZNEBNEHCUUEN 2 AP plam P HT PIT pph Message exchange is working NEXT sF plam P HT Pi on Next highest damping time value in tet L Isis e e N Is seconds ATTENTION The NEXT key raises the setting while the W PREV key lowers the setting Or you can key in a number that will be converted to closest damping value listed in Table 20 3 Repeat Step 2 until display shows Transmitter s damping time is now set to two seconds 1 eon 2119 You do not need to press the ENTER key to store the damping time in the transmitter s memory Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 5 Adjusting Damping Time continued Keystroke summary Figure 29 shows keystroke summary for adjusting damping time f
303. this reason we recommend using alarm devices with manual acknowledgment and reset See Figures B 6 and B 7 for typical piping installations Figure B 6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control Temperature sensor 1 2 3 valve manifold Temperature standard type controller Differential pressure thermostat transmitter lt Insulated enclosure Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 243 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods continued Electric heating continued Figure B 7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control D valve Electric heating Union or coupling cable Shut off valve Process pressure transmitter amp Insulated enclosure Temperature controller thermostat Temperature sensor Steam heating Steam heating is perhaps the most common yet potentially the most damaging method of protecting transmitters from freeze ups Since steam is generated for use in the overall process operation it is considered an available by product The most important point to remember when steam heating transmitter meter bodies is the temperature of the steam that will be used and its pressure We recommend that you review the next paragraph Superheated steam considerations to ge
304. tial Pressure EMT osito e a E RENE S Electromagnetic Interference GP Gauge Pressure HPI M ES High Pressure PIP dote t A High Pressure Side DP Transmitter uso EET Em Inches of Water LGB aec tete ik ceo a hua In Line Gauge Pressure tod m oS aes tat Low Pressure LP Low Pressure Side DP Transmitter veda adieu ashi at emsa Lower Range Value uc Milliamperes ste DER eue Rei e e eiie ee Ratis Millimeters of Mercury eratac dnd atte cie et de National Pipe Thread el Printed Circuit Board oet aes eee rue tuper epe A eret Process Manger PROM Ps Programmable Read Only Memory PSLQ sassa RC NO eR d RERO RU Pounds per Square Inch PSTA nran BRE RET RI eR Pounds per Square Inch Absolute Radio Frequency Interference SEC usur aaa ka ua etse a u a ss Smart Field Communicator TotalPlant Solution URE es nayun sh nama latins fiac tius uo tasas i Pon I PME Upper Range Limit URV canem tuse tte aate Hu Upper Range Value AEE lu unread DLL a Aetas Volts Direct Current XMTR ide ido he eee he eie c uW iei aU eee by Transmitter
305. ting Data in Scratch Pad Area sss eterne enne i a nnne 157 Saving and Restoring a Database sess eere enne nnne nennen enne 160 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 Tables Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table D 1 Table D 2 Table D 3 Table D 4 Table D 5 Table D 6 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51 n 163 Summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications n nn 165 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes asan a 166 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms 171 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings cccecccescssecesceseceseceneescecseecaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeesseceseeesecaecnaeeneeeneeenes 174 Replacing PW scettr eue eve ie e 175 Replacing Meter Body Only seis eee esee ete esset iode e de ie edes 178 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode eene 185 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC nn eren 189 Resetting Calibration Data With SFC uu au l ananas a ipana
306. tiple channel configuration Maximum output current that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This current is the maximum through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel configuration Maximum capacitance that can be connected to the apparatus Maximum inductance that can be connected to the apparatus recognize these parameters at this time Continued on next page 256 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations continued Entity Concept Under entity requirements the concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criteria for interconnection is that the voltage Vmax and current Imax which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe considering faults must be equal to or greater than the voltage Voc or Vt and current Isc or It levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus considering faults and applicable factors In addition the maximum unprotected capacitance Ci and inductance Li of the intrinsically safe apparatus including interconnecting wiring must be less than or equal to the capacitance Ca and inductance La which can be safely connected to the associated apparatus If these criteria are met then the combination may be connected and remain
307. tments See Figure 32 for typical local adjustment connections and setup details Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments Step Action cap from terminal block side of electronics housing 1 Turn OFF transmitter power Loosen end cap lock and remove end 2 Observing polarity connect a milliammeter across positive and negative TEST terminals ATTENTION jf you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and of the milliammeter Span adjustment option you may use the Local Smart Meter in place Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 85 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Continued Procedure continued Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments continued Step Action 3 Loosen end cap lock and remove end cap from PWA side of electronics housing to expose Local Zero and Span assembly or Local Smart meter with Zero and Span adjustments Example Local Zero and Span Assembly Honeywell Example Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustments Honeywell v v v v Continued on next page 86 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments Continued Procedure continued Table27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustme
308. to the selections in Step 3 the meter display will show an error code Er1 for one second and then return to the previous engineering units selection Selection codes for engineering units Honeywell v v v v 0 EU1 ANALOG InH2O Press and hold to scroll backward through selections EU0 EU1 inH O EU2 mmHg EU3 PSI EU4 KPa EU5 MPa EU6 mbar EU7 bar EU8 g cm EU9 Kg cm EUA mmH O EUB inHg EUC mH O Press and hold to scroll forward through selections These selections EUD GPM have indicators on EUE GPH EUF Custom the display Goes blank for 1 2 second and returns with reading in engineering units Honeywell v v 0 048 ANALOG InH2O v oA Digital reading now e in engineering units of inches of water Continued on next page 108 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Selecting Engineering Units continued Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units continued If selected engineering unit does not match Use stick on label for engineering units one of six unit indicators on meter peel off without indicators on display matching stick on unit label from sheet drawing number 30756918 001 and paste it in lower right hand corner of meter Honeywell v v 0 102 ANALOG Stick on label identifies selected engineering un
309. tter is calculating its output based on the characterization equation alone without any compensation for the small residual errors of zero offset and span correction For example a typical zero offset correction is less than 0 1 inH5O for a 400 inH5O range and a typical span correction is less than 0 2 regardless of the range down to the point where specification turndown begins The typical performance of a 400 inH5O transmitter after a calibration reset or a Corrects Reset as it is often called can be expressed as 0 1 Accuracy 0 2 4 Span inH20 100 By correcting the zero input the typical performance will be 0 2 or better For other transmitter ranges the initial zero offset will be scaled by the ratio of the Upper Range Limit URL to 400 inH gt O at 39 2 F 4 C Thus for a 100 psi range the initial zero offset can be expressed by aH 0 linH20 e 219800020 O 7mH O 0 025psi 400inH20 Note that these are typical values and they may vary However our patented characterization method includes several techniques which help to ensure that this level of performance can be achieved Continued on next page 192 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 10 5 Resetting Calibration Continued Procedure The procedure in Table 59 shows how to reset calibration data in a transmitter with an SFC Table 59 Resetting Calibration Data
310. typical piping installations for this method The process fluid must be heated above its freezing point This is frequently done by lagging in insulating the connecting nipple shut off valve and T connector with the process piping Where the process piping itself requires heating a steam or electric trace is run around their components with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing liquid Figure B 1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid 1 2 shut off valve thru port type desirable 1 2 seamless pipe slope at least 1 1 2 shut off valve per foot downward port type desirable 1 2 pipe cross G l with 2 pipe plugs seamless pipe nipple 6 long 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 long 1 2 pipe cross with 2 pipe plugs lt 1 2 seamless pipe short as possible to reduce head effect 1 2 pipe union or coupling 4 1 2 3 valve Process pressure manifold transmitter standard type Differential pressure transmitter Continued on next page 238 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 B 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Sealing liquid method continued Figure B 2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid 1 2 shut off valve thru port type desirable 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 long 1 2 pi
311. u want to change mode go to Step 2 If you do not want to change mode press CLR key to exit function 2 NON VOL olei T Isit Prompt asks for confirmation of ENTER aR E vjoju jsju R gE mode change es 3 NON VOL Al lole T siri 21 Message exchange is working ENTER sir ci es la u pE sT Mode of operation is now DE pil digital OR AU DE sT j3 2 2 2 Mode of operation is now analog OG Ix T R ILI IINE JDP SITI 13 600 Ready for next function READ iY Continued on next page 58 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 5 4 Changing Mode of Operation continued Keystroke summary Figure 22 shows keystroke summary for changing mode of operation for quick reference Figure 22 Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode of Operation A lt gt A Q SHIFT lt NON VOL ENTER Yes 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual Section 6 Configuration 6 1 Introduction Section Contents This section Includes these topics Section See Page 6 1 Introduction 6 2 Overview 6 3 Entering a Tag Number 6 4 Selecting Output Form 6 5 Adjusting Damping Time 6 6 Selecting Unit of Measurement 6 7 Setting Range Values Using SFC 6 8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments 6 9 Selecting Output Signal Mode DE Mode Only 6 10 Selecting
312. ue is on display Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in second digit and activate next active digit Readout now displays next active digit which will be zero unless lower value was set before Press Increase button to select the next available digit value or Decrease button to select the previous digit value Repeat this action until desired value is on display Meter Display First digit value setting Press and hold to scroll backward through values Honeywell OI OONN O Press and hold to scroll forward through values Third digit value setting Press and hold to scroll backward through values Honeywell O Q N O ai Press and hold to scroll forward through values 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 113 6 12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons continued Setting Lower Display Values continued Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display continued Step Action Meter Display 10 Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in third digit and activate next active digit v UPPER Honeywel v Readout now displays next active digit which v will be BLANK unless lower value was set to 1 before 4 digit is BLANK or 1 11 Press Increase button to set digit to 1 or 1 digit value setting Decrease button to set it to BLANK
313. ure 62 eene nenne 223 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 63 eene 225 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64 ene 226 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 65 eene enne 229 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts sse nennen nre ener 230 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems eene 246 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values sess 250 Factory Mutual FM Entity Parameters s 257 CSA Entity Parameters eode ttes oe tO Ia se iie Oe gie rd eere tete tg US 258 CENELEC LCIE Certification ertet tbt teet ie Fete eee ER E eei 261 Standards Australia LOSC Certification ene 262 Zone 2 Europe Declaration of Conformity sess 262 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification 264 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual xi Acronyms ode Saha de Absolute Pressure roe f erre S nu aun ce Sade m Advanced Process Manager gens ENO E See American Wire Gauge ME Digital Enhanced Communications Mode ee emer he Differen
314. ure in Table 22 for selection details Call up SFC configuration prompt CONFORMI TY and select menu item LINEAR or SQUARE ROOT Select LINEAR or SQUARE ROOT through SFC configuration prompt CONFORMITY Continued on next page 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 67 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration decision summary continued Figure 25 Flowchart ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration continued Determine appropriate damping time value for your process We suggest that you set the damping to the largest value that is reasonable for your process See procedure in Table 23 for selection details Press DAMP key and use NEXT or PREV key to select stored damping time value through SFC prompt DAMP 1 Select desired damping time value in seconds through the SFC prompt DAMP NO See Unit of Measurement in Table 24 for list of available pre programmed engineering units in the SFC See procedure in Table 24 for selection details Call up a pressure value on the SFC display and repeatedly press UNITS key to select desired pre programmed engineering units through the SFC prompt UNITS 1 Select desired pre programmed engineering units through SFC prompt UNITS Continued on next page 68 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 2 Overview Continued Configuration decision
315. ure to disconnect the SFC leads from the transmitter before unplugging them from the SFC e Be sure the SFC is disconnected from a transmitter in the analog mode before returning the loop to the automatic operating mode 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 123 Section 7 Startup 7 1 Introduction Section Contents This section Includes these topics Section See Page Introduction Startup Tasks Running Analog Output Check Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter Liquid Level Measurement Vented Tank Liquid Level Measurement Pressurized Tank Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter 140 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals About this section This section identifies typical startup tasks associated with several generic pressure measurement applications It also includes the procedure for running an optional analog output check 124 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 7 2 About startup Procedure reference 7 3 Startup Tasks Once you have installed and configured a transmitter you are ready to start up the process loop Startup usually includes e Applying process pressure to the transmitter e Checking zero input and e Reading input and out
316. valid Key Entry Errors e Interrupt Messages A description of the messages in each category is given in the following paragraphs Note that there also a few messages that we have grouped as general interrupt messages at the end of this section Non critical failures Table 61 summarizes the non critical SFC status message displays All SFC functions remain operational during a non critical failure and the sign appears on the right hand side of the display Table 61 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non Critical Failures Message Description PIT Must recalibrate transmitter to attain required accuracy CIO R RE CITISI s TlA T U s PIT 3 0 1 1 SPAN correction factor is outside the acceptable limits E X C E S S S P A N CIO RIR for accurate operation s T A T U S P T 3 0 1 1 d Zero calibration value is too large Excess zero E x c E s s z E R o c oiRiR correction may be an indication of a problem with the process or installation sITTATTTUTS T Plt Transmitter is operating as current source PLN Joju rjPjujT mope T T 1 N U E T elt Input pressure is that 2 times greater than the B O VIEJRILIO AID Upper Range Limit of the transmitter 0 5 18 T A VE OR sira rus O D Y 5 5 PIT 3 0
317. ve the transmitter s configuration database See Section 8 5 for the steps to perform save and restore functions using the SFC ATTENTION Since the SFC is compatible with other Honeywell Smartline transmitters be sure all configuration data applies to a pressure transmitter Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters Configuration Data Setting or Selection Transmitter Tag Number Up to eight characters Damping Time Constant Any one of these value selections in seconds 0 00 0 5 4 0 32 0 0 2 1 0 8 0 0 3 2 0 16 0 Type of Output Conformity LIN Linear SQRT Square Root Unit of Measurement ATTENTION Note that ST 3000 transmitters with inches of water ranges are factory calibrated using pressure referenced to a temperature of 39 2 F 4 C Pressure readings can be displayed in any one of these pre programmed engineering units H20_39F PSI MPa bar KG cm 2 mmH2O 4C mmHg 0C KPa mbar G cm 2 inHg 32F 2 4C H20_68F ATM H20_60F LRV Lower Range Value Process input for 4 mAdc 0 output Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set LRV to applied pressure URV Upper Range Value Process input for 20 mAdc 100 output Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set URV to applied pressure Continued on next page 64 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 6 05 6 2 Overview Continu
318. ximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in the following table Maximum Temperature Degrees C 450 300 280 260 230 Degrees F 842 572 536 500 446 Temperature Identification Number 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 255 D 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations continued Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters Associated Apparatus Parameters The Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows Vmax Maximum safe voltage that can be applied to the apparatus terminals Imax Maximum safe current that can be applied to the apparatus terminals CSA does not Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus that can be considered present at the terminals Unprotected inductance in the apparatus that can be considered present at the terminals The Associated Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This voltage is the maximum from a single channel Maximum output current that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This current is the maximum from a single channel Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This voltage is the maximum across any combination of terminals of a mul
319. y and process heads use Figure 1 of this addendum to locate replacement parts and use Table 3 of this addendum for part numbers and descriptions For applicability of parts refer to the appropriate Manuals following ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Series 100 Differential Pressure Models Specification and Model Selection Guide 34 ST 03 60 ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter Series 900 Differential Pressure Models Specification and Model Selection Guide 34 ST 03 65 2of8 34 ST 99 22 Addendum to 33 ST 25 14 10 04 Table 2 Torque Table Process Head Bolts Nuts Bolt Type 51452557 001 5142557 002 and 003 51452557 004 Meterbody Type Carbon Steel NACE CR option and B7M Alloy Steel standard no option Non NACE SS option 7 option specified Stainless Steel 51451864XXXX except 67 8 NeM 3 4 N M 56 9 NeM 2 8 NeM 48 8 NeM 2 4 5 All STD 3000 and SMV 3000 Transmitters except STD110 50 0 Lb Ft 2 5 Lb Ft 42 0 Lb Ft 2 1 Lb Ft 36 0 Lb Ft 1 8 Lb Ft 51451864XXX5 Model STD110 Transmitter draft range only 20 3 NeM 1 0 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 20 3 1 0 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 20 3 1 0 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft Figure 1 ST 3000 Model STD110 STD120 STD125 STD130 STD170 STD924 STD930 Rev S or greater 3 of 8 10 04 34 ST 99 22 Addendu
320. y press MENU ITEN key to MENU KPa step through other selections For ITEM example purposes stop when PSI MPa unit is on display mBAR BAR g cm 2 Kg cm 2 mmH2O 4C inHg 32F mH2O 4C GPM GPH Custom 6 If EU is Then Custom GPM go to Step 7 or GPH other than go to Step 13 Custom GPM or GPH Continued on next page 100 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 Users Manual 6 05 6 11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC continued Procedure continued Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC continued Step Press Key Read Display or Action Description 7 NON VOL ENTER YES Selected engineering unit is downloaded to transmitter and high low display limit setting function is initiated Note that Custom unit is shown for example purposes only ATTENTION you select GPM or GPH unit with the transmitter in its LINEAR mode the prompts INVALID REQUEST Download Error and MtrNotlnFlowMode are sequentially displayed after the SFC WORKING prompt and display returns to the Configure Meter prompt Transmitter must be in its SQUARE ROOT Flow mode for GPM or GPH to be a valid unit selection Press PREV key if you want to view present high and low display limits loaded in the transmitter Nic Key in 525 as upper display limit for Custom unit A
321. you install the transmitter and start using the SFC Of course if you are replacing an existing ST 3000 transmitter and you did not order a new SFC you can skip this section 6 05 ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User s Manual 17 3 2 CE Conformity Europe Notice About conformity and special conditions ATTENTION This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual and the following special conditions may invalidate this product s conformity with the EMC Directive e You must use shielded twisted pair cable such as Belden 9318 for all signal power wiring e You must connect the shield to ground at the power supply side of the wiring only and leave it insulated at the transmitter side ATTENTION The emission limits of EN 50081 2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters 98 feet to the antenna e In special cases when highly susceptible ap

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

3 Use the cursor keys - B&H Photo Video Digital Cameras  MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES Y GARANTÍA  Rexel Pocket - Standard  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file